JP7404181B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts (for example, an introduction part, a win/fail decision part, an epilogue part, etc.) are provided from the start to the end of a variable display to increase player's interest (Patent Document 1) ). In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect in which the jackpot symbol changes again after a temporary stop with a non-probability variable symbol (normal jackpot symbol), and then the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol stops, is known. (Patent Document 2).

JP2019-118411A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-179389

According to the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in making the flow of a series of performances executed look better.

The present invention was devised in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more suitably display a series of effects to be executed.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
It is possible to perform a specific performance different from the notification performance,
Characters used for the notification performance and the specific performance are depicted on the gaming machine,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the display is finished, a display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, a dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part (Figure 1, Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 283-20, Figure 283-21, Figures 326-331)
It is characterized by

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (A) below. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that execute a group effect in which a plurality of characters advance as a group, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-050851. A gaming machine is disclosed that can execute a group effect in which images of a plurality of curacters and objects appear. According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game by executing a group effect, but there is still room for improvement regarding such a group effect.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more suitably execute a group effect.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result; ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 279, a group effect execution process shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 289 and 326).
According to such a configuration, group effects can be executed more suitably.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something that you have.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special figure LED board, a 4th pattern unit, and a 4th pattern unit and a game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining an example of lottery of a performance pattern on the sub side. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of performances. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of SP latter half development). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the relief part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a figure for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. It is a figure for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the accessory action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r28) to (r31). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46). They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for explaining the modification of pattern display. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of a symbol confirmation period. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. FIG. 7 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example at the time of a loss. (r48) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portion. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a start part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a start part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design promotion after operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design maintenance after operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used for a fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unpromoted operation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display brightness data table and an operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a lost brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the shaking mode of a pattern. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a diagram looking into between a game board and an image display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table in each preview production. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overall picture of a six-person group preview. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an auxiliary display used in a group preview performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. It is a diagram looking into the space between the game board and the image display device during execution of the group preview performance. It is a diagram showing the whole picture of the Bakuchu group preview. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for board left lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for attacker lamps in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background preview brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a background notice luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. It is a figure for explaining an example of a brightness data table at the time of PUSH effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode of a comparative example when a six-person group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a background preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a lamp preview is executed at stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. 3 for explaining the production mode when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. It is a figure for explaining the detail of Boingo group notice. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of a six-person group notice and a dog group notice. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line.

<Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V big winning hole is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning hole. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFULII" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). Further, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position overlapping (superimposing) the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER FUL II" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( (overlap) position. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a stick controller 31A that serves as an operation stick that can be held by the player and tilted (operation in front, back, left, and right directions, and operation in which the player pulls it toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A to detect a tilting operation on the operation stick. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also referred to as a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player by the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the special pattern LED board 9020, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/flashing/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 22. Note that in this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and turning off in various lamps such as a frame lamp described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, number of reserved memories, right hit display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a special variable winning ball device 7B provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B. The V attacker lamp 9E and the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A indicate that the V jackpot is open and the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur. A V lamp 9G that notifies the occurrence of the occurrence, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and a push button provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the letters "POWER FULII" is divided into four parts, with the accessory lamp 9A1 being the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 being the part labeled "POWERFULII". The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, when the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (light-emit) on the back side of the member labeled with the characters "POWER FULII", "POWER FULII" lights up (light-emits).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. Also, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R. are also collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 9020 and the fourth pattern unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 9021 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 memory display section 9023 indicating the first pending memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 9024 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 9025 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 9026 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 9030 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 9027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is encouraged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 9030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed hit display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed hit display section 9030. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 9030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 30 urges the player to hit the ball to the right. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and 2 special figure 2 memory display section 9052 indicating the number of reserved memories, special figure 1 variable display section 9053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 9054 that shows a special figure 2 variable display section 9054, and a right-hitting display section 55 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being variably displayed, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 9053. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9054. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display section 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the performance control CPU 90120 receives a pre-variation pattern command, a post-variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among the performance control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are activated. , the switching of the lighting mode such as lighting/blinking/lighting out is made different. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12. One set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command will also be collectively referred to as variation pattern commands.

Specifically, when receiving a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special pattern 1 variable display 9053 and special pattern 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. . For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 to the first special symbol based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving a variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 to the second special symbol based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the variable pattern command. maintain it.

In addition, when receiving the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special symbol 1 variable display 9053 and special symbol 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the first special symbol game, the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the first special symbol. In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the second special symbol game, the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the CPU 120 for effect control receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the symbol confirmation command. maintain it.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the mode of the lamp (LED) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 changes in response to receiving the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1, the lamp mode is maintained in the game effect lamp 9 before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command is received. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving the variable pattern command. For example, when the gaming state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the lighting mode from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to receiving a variable pattern command that starts the time-saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed is displayed. At the bottom of the fourth symbol 5J, numbers indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number are displayed. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side shows the first reservation storage number, and the right side shows the second reservation storage number. At the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edge) is not visible or is difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Substrate configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the performance image, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9. For this purpose, the LED driver is supplied with brightness data (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver lights/blinks/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the performance control CPU 120. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12 and the audio control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the production control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display section under the control of the production control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started by the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 9020.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special pattern game by the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 9020 is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special figure game, a combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 9020. is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 9020 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. When a combination of lighting modes is reached, the result is a "lose". In addition, it corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol in the combination of lighting modes of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 9020. This lighting mode is also referred to as a "missing display result."

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. It should be noted that the advantageous state may be controlled to be a small winning game state. Here, a small win is a win that is allowed up to a smaller number of openings of the big winning opening than a jackpot. Note that when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning gaming state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. Further, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for the "small hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of a common figure (the period during which a common figure changes) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability of hitting a "normal figure" in the common figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Accordingly, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Further, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In addition, in the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is "SP first half (SP first half reach)", "second half of super reach" is "SP second half (SP second half reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed. As the promotion performance, for example, a re-lottery performance may be performed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability variable symbol after temporarily stopping a non-probability variable symbol (normal symbol) as a jackpot display result. Further, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state in which a non-probable variable jackpot is promoted to a certain variable jackpot.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables regarding jackpots>
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Win type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set as many as the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and in the variable probability jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 9(b) and 9(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted as a set of two commands from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 cannot specify a variation pattern by only receiving either one of the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command, but receives both the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to identify fluctuation patterns.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands.

Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no reservation after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the production control CPU 120 causes the demonstration video to be displayed on the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (higher brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the appeal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the players. In addition, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, a background in a normal state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal background) is displayed, and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER FUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of a part of the performance may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 10, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

[Main side previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or SP first half) (reach that ends with normal reach or SP first half reach after entering the reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies normal reach (SP late development) (a reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after becoming a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies to execute a normal reach (SP second half development) after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies to execute the normal reach (normal or SP first half) after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is to be executed after pseudo-variation is performed twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

[Main side post-variation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

[Determination of post-change pattern]
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 13, if the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. Furthermore, if it is determined that the jackpot is a loss in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 14, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing to SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

[Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns with post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the after fluctuation pattern with the after fluctuation number 8 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with any of the previous fluctuation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 will be obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery of production patterns on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the performance pattern by lottery based on the variable pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP first half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern performance is decided. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs the SP first half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among the multiple types of reach production, or the SP Decide on one of the winning patterns of the first half reach B.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP second half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B losing pattern productions. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a SP second half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the winning patterns of the second half reach B.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game display unit 26, and the number of pending games is displayed by lighting the game memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on passage of a predetermined switch provided inside the player (a so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability is higher than if the setting value is one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type shown in FIG. 9(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stopping process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 22. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the normal big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to a fanfare time (a time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) that is a jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82, or controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indication that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Production control main processing)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative symbols, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying to start the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "lose", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various performances in the variable display, the process advances to step S7107. For example, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot) in the performance setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a cut-in performance shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot). In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not the final reach will develop, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it will develop into the final reach, based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the identified result of whether or not it is a jackpot, determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). do. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol fluctuation control pattern is determined according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol fluctuation control pattern corresponds to the fluctuating display of the performance symbols, such as performance control process timer setting value, performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and end code. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 30 of the special pattern LED board 20 and the right-handed hitting display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times for a 3R regular jackpot, 10 times for a 10R jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 30, and the right-hand game display section 55 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left area of the game area.

<Production flow>
Next, the flow of a series of performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the fluctuating display starts until when the fluctuating display stops. The notification performance is a performance that notifies the player whether or not the fluctuations of the special symbols and decorative symbols will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The notification performance is made up of multiple performance parts, and in this embodiment, it includes a start part, an incitement part, a winning epilogue part, a loss epilogue part, a role model action part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, there is a fanfare part that is executed before transitioning to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also referred to as the introduction part. In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as the epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which a performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the fluctuation is started and the pseudo link or normal reach is executed until the SP reach is started. Note that the starting part also includes fluctuations that result in non-reach losses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The incitement part (introduction part) includes the time from the start of SP Reach (also called Super Reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP Reach) to the timing when you can reach the branch of jackpot or loss. Moreover, the inciting part is a part that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a loss depending on the performance executed. The inciting part corresponds to the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, or the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. Parts included. Note that the SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach may be collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part that informs that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a loss epilogue part that informs that a loss display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a jackpot display result and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the loss epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a loss display result and are not controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result is notified by movable accessories when announcing the win or failure after the introduction part, like the final reach described later, and when SP reach other than the final reach is announced. There are times when notifications are made by the development of a story on the liquid crystal display (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that is notified by movable accessories is also referred to as the win/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, if a jackpot occurs in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, the liquid crystal is used in the hit epilogue part as described above. It is reported that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance, and when a jackpot does not occur, it is reported by a loss epilogue part that the control is not controlled to the jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance using a liquid crystal. Depending on the first story development in the story direction, it may be suggested whether or not the game is a success. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, first of all, the win/fail notification part (accessory object movement part) determines whether or not the action of the accessory will lead to a jackpot game state. After that, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the conclusion of the story production using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the loss epilogue part will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. As the conclusion of the story production using , it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state. In this way, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes a win/fail notification part and a subsequent winning epilogue part or loss epilogue part.

In addition, corresponding to SP first half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP first half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, a winning epilogue part of the SP final reach and a loss epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Accessory action part]
The accessory motion part is a part corresponding to the period during which the SP second half develops, in which a performance indicating the development from the first half SP to the second half SP is performed by moving the movable body 32. The accessory motion part is executed after the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A or the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B. After the accessory motion part, any one of the SP second half reach A promotion part, the SP second half reach B promotion part, and the SP final reach promotion part is executed.

[Relief part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is performed that first appears to be a loss and then suggests a jackpot. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from any of the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part that is executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of first half of SP reach B, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. Executed after the win epilogue part and the rescue win part. In addition, in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery presentation part does not proceed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a variable probability symbol (probably variable). The re-lottery part may not be executed when an odd number symbol (shown in the figure) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination of validity]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at timings before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. Here, the success/failure determination is an effect that indicates a branching of whether the result is a jackpot display result or a loss display result at the final stage of the promotion part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), the series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the decision is made, at timings before and after the decision is made, from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. The parts before the determination of whether or not the answer is correct include a starting part and an inciting part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (win, loss), a relief part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of performances from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation consists of multiple parts. Furthermore, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (post-variation start). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the before fluctuation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the after fluctuation described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34(B). In the variation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (later variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the determination of validity is the inciting part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success or failure decision. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-drawing part is 20 seconds. A time has been set for this.

Next, the variation pattern of main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, will be explained using FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (post-variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-fluctuation) to the development of the second half of SP becomes the inciting part (first half of SP reach A). The incitement part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of validity. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success/fail determination. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP final reach hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the SP final reach jackpot variation pattern, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the incitement part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set such that the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation level, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total duration of the incitement part and the duration of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has higher expectations than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the period of time that excites the player can be lengthened as the variation has a higher degree of expectation, and the lingering time when the game wins can also be lengthened, making it possible to increase the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in a series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script that summarizes how each scene in a series of productions will proceed. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the presentation mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Contents such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail using diagrams for explaining the mode of effect described later. Below, the correspondence relationship between the diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and the diagrams for explaining the production mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, which will be described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half SP development). The scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half development of SP) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes shown in FIGS. 84 to 96, which will be described later. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 101 to 109, which will be described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, which will be described later.

FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). The scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, which will be described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the relief part. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed on lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for performance control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the SP reach brightness used in each part of the SP reach (incitement part, winning epilogue part, loss epilogue part, role object movement part, etc.) It includes a data table and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. A brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, a brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the jackpot game state, This includes a variable background brightness data table used in the following conditions.

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority level increases when the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table are used in this order.

For example, when outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the SP reach develops, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after SP reach ends, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach during SP reach, the production control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP reach. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table using priority over the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game effect is controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and SP reach is in progress again. When returning to the gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H, are used as "lights out", " Use terms such as "almost off," "on," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the brightness data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "extinguished". . Further, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the brightness data of the panel left lamp 9B is "00000", the panel left lamp 9B is "off". "do. Further, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "11111", the left panel lamp 9B is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V attacker lamp 9F is "extinguished". Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric lamp 9H is "000", the electric lamp 9H is turned off. Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "111", the electric lamp 9H is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the lamps 9L1 to 9L12 on the left side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and especially in this case, the brightness is Since the height is high, the lamps 9R2 to 9R12 on the right side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the accessory lamp 9A is "lit". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the luminance data (WWWWW data) of the panel left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the panel left lamp 9B is "lit", and especially in this case, since the luminance is high, the panel The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the attacker lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacker lamp 9F is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the V attacker lamp 9F is lit brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric light lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric light lamp 9H is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the electric light lamp 9H is lit brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a mode other than "lights out" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching between cases where the brightness data is "0" and "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , and blinking differ from each other in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

<Production mode of pachinko game machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game will be described. In the present embodiment, a presentation mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern with main fluctuation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the SP first half reach B inciting part (5), and the SP first half reach B losing epilogue part (7). .

When the variation pattern with main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half of reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role-playing part (8), and the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the second half of SP reach B, the start part (1), the instigation part of reach B of the first half of SP (5), the character movement part (8), and the second half of SP The production transitions in the following order: Reach A's inciting part (9), SP second half Reach B's loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's inciting part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the promotion part (12) of SP second half reach B, and the loss epilogue part (14) of SP second half reach B.

If the variation pattern with main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), the SP final The production transitions in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), the start part (1), the SP first half reach B incitement part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15) , the performance transitions in the order of SP final reach loss epilogue part (17).

If the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the production will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), SP first half reach A hit epilogue part (3), or start The production transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and SP first half reach B hit epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role model movement part (8), SP second half The production transitions in the order of Reach A's incitement part (9), SP second half Reach B's hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's incitement part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the SP second half reach B incitement part (12), and the SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of reach epilogue part (16), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP final reach incitement part (15) , and the SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are also shown. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Furthermore, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part will also be explained. In addition, in the case of a win, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of a loss, the rescue winning part that pretends to be a loss and becomes a win may perform a performance by the rescue winning part using the variation time.

[Production style in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (fluctuating display) starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a girl named Yume-chan flying is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yumu-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

At the start of the variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, effect sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as appropriate, but only some of the drawings are shown regarding the effect sounds. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, hazy lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol in a ready-to-reach mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Note that "blinking" here includes the lamp repeating turning on and off, as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), a second variation of the pseudo variation is performed. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x2" are displayed, indicating that this is the second variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), after the ready-to-reach mode is reached, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the third pseudo fluctuation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that this is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which is called reach tenpai. It becomes a mode. At the time of reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen becomes dark while the middle symbol remains fluctuated in the mode of reach-ten-pai mode. When the background darkens, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), a shutter-shaped image (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yumu-chan's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer or Yumu-chan's character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, images behind the shutter become invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a11). In the state where the shutter is closed (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59(a14) to FIG. 59(a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a13).

Thereafter, from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens. When the shutter is open in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a15). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a16). When the shutter is open in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a16). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a17). When the shutter is open in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) such that, for example, (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Furthermore, when the shutter (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "substantially off" instead of "lights off". Further, when the shutter is opened, if it has been determined to move to SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B will be displayed. When SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process moves to the effect of FIG. 62(b1), and when SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), the effect shown in FIG. Transition to the performance of e1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 67, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP first half reach A) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP first half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing the enemy character Bakuchu landing is displayed. In the state in which the title display (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display in (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. In the state (b3) where the enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), a subtitle display "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(b7), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume-up screen. In addition, in the state of (b7) where Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, in the dream chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the line "To". After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (b9) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering the line "Hehehe".

Thereafter, the background of the room is displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 65 (b10). In the room background state of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display ``Wait~'' corresponding to Yume-chan's line ``Wait~'' is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. In addition, a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) of Yume-chan's footsteps, ``zazazaza'', is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (b11), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (b11), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (b12), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, and a part of Yumu-chan's hand is also displayed, resulting in a screen where Bakuchu runs away from Yumu-chan. As shown in (b13), on the screen of Bakuchu running away, a subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Yume-chan's footsteps ``Zazazaza'' is output along with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b13) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), Bakuchu's jumping sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as onomatopoeia) in accordance with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu jumping state (b14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), on the Baku Chew Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Baku Chew character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line ``Tora~!'' is output on the Yume Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen is displayed in which Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner for deciding whether or not to accept the decision. In addition, in the scene before the decision of success or failure (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene of the decision of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (b18), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach A, the process moves to the performance of (c1). In the state of (b18), if it is determined that the SP first half reach A will be a loss, the process moves to the performance of (d1). If it is determined that the state of (b18) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) where Bakuchu is caught, a physical sound of Yumu-chan catching "Bashi!" is output in accordance with the video of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu. Further, in the state of catching a Bakushu (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakushu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (c2), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught the Bakuchu, giving the buoy sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display ``Rakusho yo!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Rakusho yo!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that a jackpot has been won. Hereinafter, smooth lighting in rainbow colors will also be referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Furthermore, in the state (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, giving a buoy sign is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying symbols (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (c5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is the part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds and that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (d1), in the loss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) in which the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 changes to a darker white than the lighting mode (tb18) of (b18) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, is kneeling in regret, and Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (td1) showing the lighting mode in (d1). Thereafter, as shown in (d3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(d4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the inciting part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 72 to 77, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The inciting part (SP first half reach B) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo face off in a hockey game. In the incitement part (SP first half reach B), a story is developed that incites that if Yume-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72(e1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach B with "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state (e2) where the screen is cracked and the title display has disappeared, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. Thereafter, as shown in (e3), an image of the appearance of the opposing characters is displayed, in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. In the state (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e4), an image of a confrontation between the friendly character Yumu-chan in the front left of the screen and the enemy character Boingo in the back right of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color on the right side where Boingo is displayed, corresponding to the Boingo character. Furthermore, at the timing when the title display (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display ``I won't lose'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't lose'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (e5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), a subtitle display "Come on, come on," corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on," is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumu-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Yumu-chan's turn, Yumu-chan's line "Ya~" is output. In addition, in the state of Yumemu turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner. Furthermore, in the pack display state (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yumu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing Boingo (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) dancing in the puck, the physical sound of the puck rotating "shururu" is output. Further, in the state (e10), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Thereafter, as shown in (e11), an image of Boingo, the enemy character, hitting the puck is displayed. Further, as shown in (e11), on the screen that is Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Further, in the state of Boingo turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumu-chan is damaged by being directly hit by the pack, and an image is displayed in which electricity is running and her bones are visible. As shown in (e13), in the state of Yumu damage, Yumu-chan's line "Wow~" is output. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e14). Further, in the state of Yumu-chan damage (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumu-chan receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the decision is made where the state in which Yumu-chan has been damaged is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (e17), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach B, the process moves to the performance of (f1). If it is determined from the state of (e17) that there will be a loss in the first half of SP reach B, the process moves to the performance of (g1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan hitting the puck back is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of the Yumu attack (f1) in which Yumu-chan attacks by hitting the puck back, a subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Go!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumu attack (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yumu-chan's attack. do.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yumu-chan's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Further, in the state (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns on (smoothly) in a rainbow direction indicating that a jackpot has been won. Furthermore, in the state (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu-chan doing a fist pump and Boingo falling down is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Yumu-chan's victory, a subtitle display ``Easy victory!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Easy victory!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (f3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumu Shoshi is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (f5). In the state of displaying symbols (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (f6) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where the story of Yumu-chan being defeated by Boingo unfolds and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yumu-chan flying further away than in the state (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image of Yumu-chan kneeling down in regret after being defeated by Boingo and Boingo smiling is displayed. As shown in (g3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) showing the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the character movement part (second half development)]
With reference to FIG. 83, the performance mode in the accessory action part (second half development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, the accessory The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state (h2), the accessory falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state (h3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. An effect in which the accessory rises from the state of (h3) is executed. If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach A after the rise of the accessory, the transition is made to the production (i1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach B after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into the final reach after the accessory rises, the process moves to the production (r1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, the production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the ally characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP second half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yumu-chan and Jam-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the SP second half reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan (characters on the far left) and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), a subtitle display ``I won't let you escape!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't let you escape!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i3), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), a subtitle display ``I'll help you too!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I'll help you too!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i4), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), a subtitle display ``I'll run away again!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines being uttered. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Let's go" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Let's go" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Come on!" corresponding to the line "Come on!" of Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatap" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state (i10) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Jam Chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "Za-Za-Za" as a physical sound are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i13), Jam-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as a physical sound are outputted in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the Jam Chasing state (i13), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that Jam-chan is jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu (i16), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound ``Sukak'' that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yumu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan's movement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state (i19) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Wait!'' is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. Further, as shown in (i21), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of chasing Yume (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i22), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i22), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yumu-chan jumping, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to Yumu-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yumu-chan was unable to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu in (i25), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. In addition, in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, a subtitle display "Next time, two people!" corresponding to the two allies' dialogue "Next time, two people!" is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i27), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, in the state of (i27) Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yumu-chan is displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yumu and Jam Up, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two characters are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. In (i30), an image in which the two people are closer to Bakushu than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the physical sound of Yume-chan and Jam-chan's footsteps ``za-za-za'' is output along with the images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of (i30) where two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Further, in the jam jumping state (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yumu-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumu Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in a two-person jump state, a subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to the lines ``Wait!'' from two allies is displayed. In the two-player jumping state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 1. In the state of two people jumping (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two people are jumping. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 2. In the two-player jumping state (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (i38), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 3. In the two-player jumping state (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4 in a scene before the determination of validity. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (i39) that there will be a jackpot in reach A in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (j1). In the state of (i39), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach A or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (k1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the (j1) state of catching Bakuchu, the physical sound of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching ``Bashi!'' is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (j1) of catching a Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``It was a shame!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It was a shame!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Furthermore, in the state (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yumu-chan who caught Bakuchu makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged in the symbol display, and the symbol is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (j4). In the state of displaying symbols (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 99 to 100, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is the part where the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the loss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu could not be caught, the onomatopoeic sound ``sukak'' is output along with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color darker than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), on the Bakushu-up screen, a subtitle display "Usssssss!" corresponding to the line "Usssssssssssssssssssssssssssss" in Bakusshu is displayed. In the explosive chew-up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan kneeling down and disappointed in not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). From the state (k5), if it has been determined that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 101 to 109, the presentation mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which a story develops in which ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan confront the enemy character crab robot. In the incitement part (SP second half reach B), a story is developed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan incite that if the crab robot beats Boingo, they will win the jackpot, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, they will lose.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekushin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the second half of the SP that will be executed from now on. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot in this reach. Note that this display indicating the jackpot expectation level may be displayed at another SP reach. In the state where the title display (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (leftmost characters) and an enemy character crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, a subtitle display ``I will not lose!'' is displayed corresponding to the lines ``I will not lose!'' of the two allies. In the confrontation state (n2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach B is output.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state (n4) of two people running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running into a hollow in a rocky area to escape from the crab's beam is displayed. In the two-person jump state (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam (n6) is passing, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan relaxing in the shadow of a rocky area is displayed. As shown in (n7), on the screen where the two people are relieved, a subtitle display "Haaha" corresponding to Jam's line "Haaha" is displayed. In the confrontation state (n7), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), a subtitle display "It's my turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's my turn!" is displayed on the Jam Up screen. Furthermore, in the jam-up state (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab using the technique described by Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the jam attack state (n9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab uttering the line "Gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Thereafter, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state of (n13) where two people run away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan receiving damage from the crab's beam is displayed. Further, in the state (n15) in which two players receive damage, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that two players have received damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up after receiving damage is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two people stand up, a subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "From now on!" is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two people stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, in the Nana-up state (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana-chan offers a prayer is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer movement is performed to confuse the enemy. Furthermore, in the state of Nana's prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink in response to Nana's praying action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab being confused by Nana's prayer performance is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab's confusing movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion and getting angry is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of a crab waving its arms to attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana receiving damage from a crab attack is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Nana receiving damage (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam-chan holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display ``Leave it to me!'' corresponding to Jam's line ``Leave it to me!'' is displayed on the Jam remote control operation screen. Furthermore, in the Jam remote control operation state (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the Jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect in which a hand appears from the sky is performed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the player is going to catch crabs, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether the decision is made or not, in which an enlarged image of the crab and hand is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (n27) that there will be a jackpot in reach B in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (o1). In the state of (n27), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach B or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 112, the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning against the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky and catching a crab is displayed. Further, as shown in (o1), on the screen where the crab is caught, a subtitle display "Yareta~" corresponding to the crab's line "Yareta ~" is displayed. In addition, in the crab catching state (o1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to catching a crab. Thereafter, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab installed as a signboard for the shop is displayed. Also, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 turns on in a rainbow light (smoothly) indicating that the player has won the jackpot. Also, in the state (o2), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Further, as shown in (o3), on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard, a subtitle display ``Nice signboard'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Nice signboard'' is displayed. Further, in the state of the shop (o3) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen continues where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Furthermore, as shown in (o4), a subtitle display ``Work hard'' corresponding to Nana's line ``Work hard'' is displayed on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard. Further, in the state of the shop (o4) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (o6). In the state of displaying symbols (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being defeated by a crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand extending from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch a crab (p1), the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to not being able to catch a crab. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of a crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab running away state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown on page 3, an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan looking down in regret after being run away by crabs is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (p3), on the disappointing screen, a subtitle display ``Sonone~'' corresponding to the lines ``Sonone~'' of the two allies is displayed. Further, as shown in (p3), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state of (p5) that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 115 to 132, the production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach) will be described. The inciting part (SP final reach) is the part where a story unfolds in which six ally characters, Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. It is. In the inciting part (SP final reach), a story is told that if 6 people can catch Bakchu, it will be a jackpot, and if 6 people can't catch Bakchu, it will be a loss. Moreover, the inciting part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest jackpot expectation among all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the inciting part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach, ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP final reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yumu-chan face off against the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen. The image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies, ``This is the last time,'' are output. Furthermore, in the confrontation state (r2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the six characters saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again'' is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display ``Watch'' corresponding to Maid A's line ``Watch'' is displayed. In the state of Maid A display (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r6), when Maid B is displayed, the subtitle display ``I'll do my best'' corresponding to Maid B's line ``I'll do my best'' is displayed. In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color in response to maid B uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'll catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'll catch you" is displayed. In the Nana-chan display state of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display ``Yakuryo dho'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Yakuryo dho'' is displayed. In the Jam-chan display state of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Everyone is going!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone is going!" is displayed. In the Yumu-chan display state of (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display ``Anyone can come over'' corresponding to the Bakuchu's line ``Anyone can come over'' is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering its lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed. Is displayed. In the state of AD & Maid A chasing (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in blue in response to the maid A character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, a subtitle display "Will you be caught!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Will you be caught?" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r13) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state of (r14) where the game is running away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 120 (r16), when an image of Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the Nana chasing state (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the state where Maid B and Nana are chasing (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in Hawaiian blue color in response to Maid B's character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in pink in response to the Nana character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r18) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r20), when an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. be done. In the dream chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the dream dream & jam chase state of (r21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the Yumu-chan character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r23) where Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound is the same as Maid A's, "Too!", but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), in a scene where the Jam-chan character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, ``Toriya!'' is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when a close-up image of six allies is displayed, a subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the six allies' lines "This is the last!" is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r36) where six allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the six players saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), a close-up image of six allies is continuously displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r37) with six allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the city background. Further, in the state of Bakuchu display (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Thereafter, as shown in (r39), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabee!!!" is displayed. Ru. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu-up state (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with a concentrated line superimposed on the image of the explosive chew-up. Further, in the state of (r40) Baku Cheup + button display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid button operation period, the three main characters of the pachinko machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumu-chan, and Jam-chan, will be cut in on the screen, as shown in (r41). will be displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed by cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is finished, an image of six people jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. Further, in the state of cut-in and release (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. Thereafter, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen where Bakushu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the Bakushu is displayed in a larger size than in (r44).

After that, as shown in Figure 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed enlarged than in (r45), the subtitles corresponding to the six allies' lines "We've cornered you!" " is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of displaying six allies (r47), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the six allies saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is outputted to encourage the player to perform the operation. Further, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is more concentrated in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in the state (r50) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. In a state in which the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in a state where the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In a state where the close display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In a state where the close display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the decision is made where the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4 appears. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state where the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determined scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it has been determined from the state (r54) that there will be a jackpot in the SP final reach, the process moves to the performance (s1). In the state of (r54), if it has been determined that the SP final reach will be a loss or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (u1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 133 to 136, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part where it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story in which six people catch the Bakushu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the SP final reach epilogue part, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen as the object begins to fall. be done. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. From the state of (s3), an effect in which the accessory rises is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the accessory has been raised, a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s4), a subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Furthermore, in the state (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" is displayed continuously. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people celebrating after catching Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the ``222'' pattern is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state in (s8). In the state of displaying the symbols (s9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story unfolds in which the six players were unable to catch the Bakushu.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) where the Bakushu escapes, the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the six people are disappointed that Bakchu ran away into the distance and were unable to catch him. Further, as shown in (u2), on the Sorry screen, a subtitle display ``Unfortunate~'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Unfortunate~'' is displayed. As shown in (u2), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) indicating the lighting mode in (u1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state (u4) that the game will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production style in the rescue part]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 140, the effect mode in the rescue part will be explained. The rescue winning part is a part in which a story is developed based on a rescue performance that becomes a jackpot after the story of a loss is developed. In the rescue part, a premium character named Drum-kun, who does not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief part, a relief effect in which a character named Drum-kun is displayed on the screen is executed. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that he has won a comeback disguised as a loss. In the rescue performance of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, the screen becomes white-out as shown in (v3). In the whiteout (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (v3). In the state of displaying symbols (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd or even symbols derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-lottery part (odd number or even number design derived after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 141 to 156, the flow of a series of presentations from detailed presentation of symbols in the promotion presentation to button operation in the re-lottery presentation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. When the two symbols (A5) are in the normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery effect starts. In the state (A6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp. After that, in the symbol fluctuation period shown in FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbols have moved downward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the symbol fluctuation period, a screen with the symbol displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of two symbol fluctuations. Thereafter, as shown in (A9), during the movement start period of the re-lottery performance, the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative symbols change at high speed to perform replacement display. When the replacement display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, and thus the decorative pattern is switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of variation (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc., and the display becomes thinner. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started from the 2 symbols passes through one cycle and the 2 symbols are clearly displayed again, a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the 2 symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), when the two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. After that, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, etc. , the symbols are replaced while changing at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (C1).

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, the production mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) will be described. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an odd numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "333" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the three-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a larger size than in (B1). In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the three symbols (B5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" swings up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the three-symbol shaking state (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (B7). In the normal background shaking state (B7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern "333" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of flashing rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed, after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even numbered symbols are derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the production mode in the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) will be described. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an even numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of two-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the "222" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the two-symbol enlargement state (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the two symbols (C5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a swinging period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (C7). In the normal background shaking state (C7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern "222" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (C9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains smooth lighting in rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (E2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(Start 6)
Furthermore, the shutter described above is configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect performed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is opened. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
Note that the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in the active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and the active pending display corresponds to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing of the development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Inciting 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Inciting 2)
Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

(Inciting 3)
Note that the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Inciting 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

(Inciting 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A, SP first half reach B as the first inciting part that is executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second inciting part that is executed at the timing of the second half. , SP late reach B, and SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

(Inciting 6)
In addition, in the aforementioned inciting part, the character of Yumu-chan plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, and the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of the SP. There were scenes where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. In addition, in the second half of the SP Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

(Inciting 11)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there are scenes in which each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

(True or false 1)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

(True or false 2)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and after that, the screen corresponding to the operating means displays the subtitles. The performance that was being performed becomes no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

(True or false 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed, The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

(True or false 4)
In addition, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly every time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progression of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(True or false 5)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

(True or false 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

(True or false 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(True or false 14)
In addition, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 The images are displayed in a static state for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

(True or false 16)
Further, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, there is an introduction image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is a success or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(True or false 18)
Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the scenes of the decision of validity shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

(Epilogue 1)
The above-mentioned win epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes a scene where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocation part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIG. 134 (s6) to FIG. 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the symbol display is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from mistaking it as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background become still images. There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the display of the symbols shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, subtitles displayed at other timings may be given a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, by adding a fade effect to the display of subtitles other than the final one, effective switching can be achieved, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display can overlap the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and from being mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the symbols. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed during the presentation of symbols in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when presenting a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be changed again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

(Re-lottery performance 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

(Re-lottery performance 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIG. 144 (A10) to FIG. 156 (A46) and FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. The operation promotion display will be displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

(Re-lottery performance 16)
The pattern display in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using substantially the same video. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same.

(Re-lottery performance 17)
In the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 18)
In the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery performance. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

<Detailed explanation regarding production mode>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned production mode, characteristic parts and modifications that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191.

[About Inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (b11) to (b13) parts)
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In line with this character arrangement, the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, corresponding to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yumu-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Zazaza" are output as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output.

Further, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the front-rear direction, Bakuchu is in the front and Yumu-chan is behind. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Bakuchu is nearby and Yumu-chan is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volumes is as follows: ``Wait~'', the sound of Yumu-chan's line > Bakuchu's footsteps, ``ta-ta-ta-ta'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``za-za-za-za''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sounds of Yumu-chan's lines in the distance are louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, who are closer.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and the physical sounds of Yumu-chan's footsteps "zazazaza" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as physical sounds. The relationship between the volumes is ``Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tata-ta-tat'' > Yume-chan's footsteps, ``za-za-za-za.'' In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's nearby footsteps are louder than Yumu-chan's distant footsteps to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yumu-chan is in the front and Bakuchu is behind her in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Yumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volume is as follows: Bakuchu's line sound in ``Let's get caught!'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > Baku-chu's footsteps, ``Tata-ta-tat''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sound of Bakuchu's lines in the distance is louder than the sound of Yumu-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Inciting 12)
In the inciting part, the BGM of SP Reach is output, and there are also scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also referred to as action sounds) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(Inciting 13)
Here, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Inciting 15)
Additionally, if the dialogue sound of a character who is far away from the player overlaps with the physical sound from a character who is closer to the player, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. has been done. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easy to convey to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[About Inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. As shown in FIG. 166(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko game machine 1, the relationship among the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The output volume level has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Furthermore, when these three sounds overlap, the way the sound is output is different depending on whether the sound is a dialogue sound with subtitles or a dialogue sound without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sound with subtitles, when the dialogue sound (with subtitles), physical sound, and SP reach BGM are output at the same timing, the volume of SP reach BGM is It is controlled to output at a lower level. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sound without subtitles, when the dialogue sound (without subtitles) is output at the timing when the physical sound and SP reach BGM overlap, the dialogue sound> It is controlled to output without changing any volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Inciting 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it is heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

(Inciting 16)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound, and a case where there is no subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound. In the case, the BGM of SP Reach is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method for effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of output volume levels is the same: dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and the dialogue sound overlap and are output, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Inciting 16)
As shown in Figures 167(B) and (C), there is a difference between a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, and a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle. The volume will be adjusted to be louder only for those who are listening. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[About incitement 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), in the scene where Maid A is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where Maid B is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in the scene where Nana-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r32), in a scene where Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, the sound of Jam-chan's dialogue, "Toriya!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in the scene where Yume-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output lines are one-word lines that seem to be enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, the scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Furthermore, in these specific scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the story development compared to other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Inciting 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part, but no subtitles are attached (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Inciting 8)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), colors other than those corresponding to the character in the previous scene are used. Control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic parts in FIGS. 171 and 172 will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the determination of validity, the game effect lamp 9 maintains a white lighting state. Thereafter, when the SP develops into a second half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state (h2), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. In addition, a sound corresponding to an accessory that corresponds to the falling of an accessory is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (h2). In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the (h4) retreating state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the accessory action part to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (inciting part) changes. . After that, in the state (h5), the accessory increases further. In the state (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory increases further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (h7), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP begins to be faintly visible. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach, is output. Note that sound effects related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. Thereafter, in the state (h8), the accessory increases further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state (h9), the accessory increases further. In the state (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h8), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state (h10), the accessory increases further. In the state (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h9), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, in the state (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the scene of the start of SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

(Start 4)
Note that an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes the use of accessories.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before determining the validity of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation promotion display to encourage the operation. The movable body 32 as an accessory operates when the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period or when the predetermined period elapses. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. Here, the period of time during which the accessory is falling in the scene of the success/failure notification is longer than the time during which the accessory is falling in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen with respect to the accessory as the accessory begins to fall. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Specifically, the effect image in the scene of the success/failure notification like (s1) is a rainbow color. Note that the effect images in scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state (s2), the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. In the state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, in the state (s3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. When the state of (s3) changes to the saving state of (s3-2), the brightness that is output from the brightness data table for the role object movement of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part The data table changes. After that, in the state (s3-3), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (s3-6), the accessory increases further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-6), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state (s4), a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line ``Ugh, I got caught.'' In the state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display changes to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the ascent, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In situations where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, dialogue sounds are not output, and dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to its initial position. Just display it. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the win/fail decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[About Epilogue 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, there is no dialogue, so there are no subtitles.

In addition, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of lines is 5 and the number of subtitles is 3. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, there are no dialogues, so there are no subtitles. In addition, in the case of SP second half reach A, the number of lines is 16 and the number of subtitles is 14. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1.

In addition, in the case of SP second half reach B, the number of lines is 9 and the number of subtitles is 7. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In addition, in the case of SP final reach, the number of lines is 27 and the number of subtitles is 19. In addition, in the case of the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of lines is 2 and the number of subtitles is 2. In the case of the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for each line of dialogue.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, a suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the inciting part, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[About re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, characteristic parts in the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then are reduced in size as shown in (A3) and (A4). Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect and the re-lottery effect is started. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp.

Thereafter, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbol oscillates up and down. Thereafter, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located in the center is once reduced. After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed again from (A10') to (A23'). The high-speed fluctuations are performed in a manner similar to the above.

Thereafter, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been displayed twice, the button image is faintly displayed together with the "2" symbol that was initially displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern changes rapidly as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and as time passes The time gauge displayed under the button image will decrease accordingly. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid period of button operation has ended, an odd number is displayed as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. A symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a jackpot.

(Re-lottery performance 1)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 4)
At the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery performance 5)
In the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

(Re-lottery performance 7)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(Re-lottery performance 8)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and again "2". '', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', all the decorative patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

(Re-lottery performance 9)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

(Re-lottery performance 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns are sent in order of ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', but each symbol The displayed time is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 11)
During the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

(Re-lottery performance 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding performance. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

(Re-lottery performance 13)
Note that the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 14)
In the lottery performance, there are two patterns: a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. It was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 15)
In the lottery performance, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, Common data is used in any of the patterns in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the promotion part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), a part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is the inciting part, will be explained.

In state (b4), a screen where Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In addition, in the state (b4'), the dialogue sound for "I found it" is not output, but as in the state (b5), the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%. .

After that, as shown in (b5'), in the layer below the subtitle with 0% transparency for "I found it", which corresponds to Yume-chan's dialogue, "I found it", which corresponds to Bakuchu's dialogue, is transparent. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. Thereafter, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "I found it" and the subtitle "I found it" are displayed in such a state that their transparency is both 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" that corresponds to Yumu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle "Found" that corresponds to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states (b5') and (b5''), the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, and when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state (b6), the dialogue sound is not output. There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. For example, in FIG. 178(B), the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progress of the song sung by Nana-chan: ``I'll definitely get it someday.'' Immediately afterwards, subtitles (lyrics) appear as the song progresses, saying, ``I'll grab it with my little hands.'' If such subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of the change is easy to understand.

(Inciting 21)
In the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed text with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(Inciting 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. Sometimes. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Variation example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, instead of adding a fade effect to both of the two subtitles, a fade effect may be applied to one of the subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which a fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern that does not include is possible. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the pattern with the above-described pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. Furthermore, when applying a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display.

In addition, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described in the case where the timings at which the subtitles are displayed overlap. However, when the same character utters lines consecutively, the subtitle display for the second line may be overlapped after the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Inciting 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding a fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(About the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at 70% transparency one frame after 100% transparency. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of the line "I found it" was not output.

After that, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% while the sound of the dialogue "I found it" is output. Then, during period T1, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, but starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "found" is faded in. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transmittance of 70% one frame after the transmittance is 100%. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% during the period when the dialogue sound "Found" is output. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "found," the subtitle "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out. Effects are added. Furthermore, fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Inciting 23)
As shown in Figure 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and is output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

(Comparison of subtitles between the incitement part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the inciting part. Further, FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). 180(A) and 180(B) have in common that subtitles are displayed consecutively for lines uttered by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), it is displayed that Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180(B), in parts (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard was the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed, and Jam-chan's line " The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard Nene" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed without subtitles. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. Afterwards, the background of the shop with the crab as its sign becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the incitement part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed multiple times in one scene (period 0 to t1 and period 0 to t2). There are cases. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to erase the subtitle display that has been displayed to make it easier to understand the change in subtitle display. However, when there is not enough time, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to make the switching of subtitles easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, a video is first created, and then audio such as dialogue is added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. Suppose that it would be time-consuming to recreate a video with a longer period for temporarily erasing the subtitle display during the period 0 to t1, where a large amount of time is not available. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to recreate the video. In addition, even when there is sufficient time, such as the epilogue part when the crab signboard shop is displayed, by uniformly applying a fade effect, the overall workload is reduced, and when switching subtitles. This can prevent any discomfort from occurring.

(Inciting 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

(Inciting 25)
Here, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the inciting part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the inciting part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Inciting 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). With reference to FIG. 182, a description will be given of the correspondence between effects using decorative patterns and small patterns on the screen and effects using the game effect lamp 9. As shown in (B4), the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced in the symbol presentation performance of the re-lottery part. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, based on receiving the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a flashing rainbow-colored lighting mode.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Furthermore, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after approximately 33 msec to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), after the game effect lamp 9 appears, the screen changes to a screen where the words "FEVER" and Yume-chan, which indicate the fanfare mode, are displayed. Further, at this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the fanfare is maintained.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of pattern placement. In a modified example, the symbols may be put out in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the reduced decorative symbols (reduced symbols) in the scene of catching the Bakuchu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern at the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration "222" which had been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking.

In the pattern display of the modified example, the decorative patterns move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach, and the symbols are aligned at the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced symbol once deleted after the reduced symbol fluctuation period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the center position of the screen and the first symbol effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). location). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). ``222'' is displayed in the same position as ``222''. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

FIGS. 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the re-lottery. In a modified example, a case will be described in which, for example, a re-lottery is executed from the drawing of symbols in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, after the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Thereafter, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

Thereafter, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation.

FIG. 185 shows a case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 185, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed fluctuation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1", and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). Thereafter, as shown in (G19), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to a background for pattern shaking. Here, as the symbol shaking, an operation of shaking the symbol is performed by rotating the symbol on the screen from the back side to the front side. Specifically, after the symbol swings toward the back from (G20) to (G21), the symbol swings toward the front from (G22) to (G23), thereby changing to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (G24) to (G25), and then swings toward the back from (G26) to (G27), thereby changing to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12), the "3" symbol will remain displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge will decrease as time passes. . Thereafter, as shown in (H7), the button image is displayed faintly and then erased. After that, "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the backgrounds shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the amount of time the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period in which the effect of shaking three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily goes white out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state (J2), move counterclockwise around the vertical direction of the "3 symbols" to (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation is so fast that the design appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the symbol swings toward the back from (J11) to (J12), and then from (J13) to (J14), the symbol moves toward the front. It changes to the initial position by swinging. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. The shaking movement of the symbols from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the shaking movement of the symbols from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About losses 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol confirmation period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of validity corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. The details of the symbol confirmation period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part will be explained using (X2) to (X5). Further, the details of the symbol confirmation period when the state moves from the state (X1) to the losing epilogue part will be explained using (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which the Bakuchu is caught is displayed, as shown in (X2). Thereafter, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as (B8) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like (B11) begins. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period begins.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the loss epilogue part, an image of the state of regret (u2) in which the player was not able to catch the Bakushu is displayed, as shown in (X6). Thereafter, as shown in (X7), the background is blacked out and a symbol combination indicating a loss display result of "232" is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. Thereafter, after being controlled to the normal screen, there is a symbol determination period in which symbols such as (X9) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display after the end of the symbol confirmation period, the next variable display will be started.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. The details of blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate state (u2) of not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. From this state, the blackout background will be displayed with its transmittance gradually decreasing, and the background of the middle design showing "3", which is one of the decorative designs displayed in the center, will gradually decrease its transmittance. displayed. By lowering the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle design gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. Thereafter, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. Thereafter, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. Thereafter, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. Thereafter, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 40%. Thereafter, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 20%. Thereafter, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. Thereafter, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, from (X19) to (X20), there is a symbol shaking period in which the middle symbol "3" swings up and down. After the symbol shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). After that, as shown in (X22), the symbol confirmation period begins. As shown in Figure 189, the background blackout starts earlier than the medium pattern fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transmittance switching than the medium pattern fade-in. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the medium symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: The number of steps is greater than the number of steps required to progress in the process. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

(Loss 5)
The image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss blacked out, the medium symbol faded in, and as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% A blacked-out background is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan as information about the pachinko machine 1. be done. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Regarding losses 8, 10 to 17]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp in the case of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example in the case of a loss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamps when the game is lost, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when the game is lost. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when losing in the final SP reach, but the performance when losing in other reaches such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, etc. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect (X30) in which six ally characters are disappointed to the effect in (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. Note that the brightness data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before returning to the normal screen after a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped). The image is displayed.

A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen (X34) and the symbol confirmation period (X35), the background changes to the next fluctuation (X36), which is executed when the fluctuation pattern command with hold is received. A luminance data table for Note that the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the lose epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

Note that the background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern confirmation period (X35). In addition, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the presentation screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and a brightness data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is turned off in the state (X35). After that, by receiving the variable pattern command when there is reservation, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 becomes blinking in the state of (X36). In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 remains off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Furthermore, as a modification in case of a loss, the brightness data table in each state may be different from that in this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, during the (X42) eye-catch screen switching period, (X43) eye-catch screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is It may also be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the background brightness data table may be used.

Here, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before eye-catching display (when losing). In addition, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when the game is lost will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of the variation pattern command of the next variation, which is the trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 13)
A modification example in case of a loss will be explained. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the effect in which the six ally characters are disappointed in (X40) to the effect in which the background image is blacked out in (X41). The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

(Loss 14)
The final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

(Loss 15)
After the symbol is determined, if there is no pending memory, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

(Loss 16)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Regarding validity 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of validity will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) shows a scene in which the final instigation is performed before the decision is made. FIG. 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the Bakushu (r48-1) is displayed, six allies are displayed as (r48-2). After that, the display of Bakushu like (r48-1) is displayed again, and then the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. Thereafter, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or false 8)
The scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(True or false 9)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

(True or false 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

(True or false 11)
In the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

(True or false 12)
During the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes will now move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

<Explanation regarding game effect lamps>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 stores information in the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) for each part such as the start part and the inciting part). Display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the image display device 5 . The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control on the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extended command for specifying the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , information specifying a child table to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp (child table designation address) are stored. Note that in the parent table, only lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric tube lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the accessory lamp 9A, and child table LD1 is specified for the panel left lamp 9B. , the child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric lamp 9H.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp. This is specified, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are designated for each time such as ta1 to ta19.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp. , the performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to brightness data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. For example, in a production where Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and when the current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. . In a production in which Maid A appears, data of "00F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in blue. In a production where Maid B appears, data of "0AC" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and as a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In a performance where an AD appears, data of "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow. In a production in which Jam-chan appears, the data "A5F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in purple. In a performance where Nana-chan appears, "F3F" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in pink. In a production where Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately displayed at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. specified. The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and reads the brightness data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. is referred to as data 4, data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data “AAA” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and updates data 1 to data 7 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 3000 msec. However, after outputting data 1 to data 7, if the time measurement has not yet reached 3000 msec, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and such 10-minute data in the parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another from where a problem occurs. can do.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 193, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. When the value of the timer reaches 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, which plays a role in preventing lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the child table.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the brightness data table used in the start part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is set as 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information specifying child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced during control is stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the frame lamp child table WD1, the time of the start part of the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are indicated by "omitted" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp for 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink twice in white.

During times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is designated. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to gradually reduce the brightness in response to effects such as shutter closing as shown in FIGS. 58 (a10) to (a12). While doing so, the frame lamp lights up in red.

During times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to change the state from the fully closed state of the shutter as shown in FIGS. 59 (a13) to (a15) and FIGS. The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state, corresponding to the effect of opening in stages after being maintained for a period of time.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp changes color and brightness, such as background lighting in yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red. While the brightness data switches so that it lights up/blinks while changing the brightness, at times ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the luminance data is set such that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. maintained, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the brightness data is maintained so that after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp remains in a reduced brightness state and turns on in red. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the brightness can be adjusted so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Data may be maintained.

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to an effect in which the shutter is kept fully open as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "lights out" here refers to a state in which the luminance data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. It's okay to be. In addition, in the following description, "lights out" may also be "substantially lights out". At time ta19, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame control is performed based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 becomes 0. The lamp remains off.

In this manner, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing at which the shutter is fully opened can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 195, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified during 1560 msec of time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tb14 and 210 msec of time tb17, respectively. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the next 30 msec is "000" (lit in white). 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). For example, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 150 msec. When lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time tb17. Flashing.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach A, Yumu-chan makes a Bakuchu before the decision of success or failure (jackpot, loss, development of the second half of SP reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to a performance that incites whether or not the player will catch it. At time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the second brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the win/fail decision in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A inciting part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the production control CPU 120 responds to Yumu-chan by making it correspond to the production in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, when a character has dialogue as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and 63(b9) but no subtitles, the production control CPU 120 creates a frame in a color corresponding to the character. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). to make the frame lamp flash white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has RGB data of "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so that the winning can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

At time tc2 and time tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to a performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 68(c2) and (c3). Lights up in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP reach A in the first half, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP reach first half A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD0 for common symbol display is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to a performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 69(c4) and (c5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 69 (c6). Light. At time tc6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach A is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, during 200 msec of time td1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the loss notification has RGB data of "888" or "444". . As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tb18), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time td2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the loss 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp from td1 in response to the performance in which Yume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2). It also lights up in a dark white color.

As mentioned above, when the rainbow lights up at the time of winning (tc2, tc3), the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, whereas when the darker white lighting occurs at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data changes for 250 msec longer than at the time of winning. Switch at intervals. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is designated. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 70(d3). .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). Turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed at the time of a loss has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is different from the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 controls the time until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold. The lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data until the customer waiting command is received in the progress, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command is not received yet, the lamp control is performed again. Lamp control is performed based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, during the period from when the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until when the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to the display of the normal screen at time td4. In this case, an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table, which is also used in the start part, is used as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the design is finalized, and lamp control can be performed based on the grandchild table W21 that is also used in the start part. , the performance using the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referred to when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 199, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec of time te8 and for 210 msec of time te12. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. At both time te8 and time te12, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time te8, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time te12. Flashing.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach B, the player tries to incite whether or not Yumu-chan loses in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the performance. At time te18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). The lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yume-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in cream color, corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Make the left lamp blink. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame right lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to an effect in which Boingo located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the first half of SP reach B incitement part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to a performance such as Boingo hitting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is Yume-chan's dialogue but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7). let

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yumu-chan hits the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1). The frame lamp blinks in white in accordance with the performance.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is designated. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to productions in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins, as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, regarding the frame lamp, the time of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tf5 and time tf6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and (f6). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, an effect is created in which Boingo is attacked and Yumu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP reach first half B is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec between time tg1 and time tg2. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which Yumu-chan is blown away as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to this.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumu-chan is disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and (g3), and sets the frame Light the lamp in a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a yellow background lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the role model movement part during the second half of SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table that is referred to in the accessory action part is specified for the frame lamp. In addition, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the accessory movement shown in Fig. 171 (h1) to (h3) (Fig. 83 (h1) to (h3)). It will be done.

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified during 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories to fall as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the validity branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). In response to this effect, the frame lamp flashes in red.

It should be noted that lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A during the period of 7000 msec from time th1 to th3 during which the accessory falls. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to th3 when the accessory falls, the performance control CPU 120 controls the child table corresponding to the falling motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A is blinked in red.

Thereby, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the presentation in which the accessory falls.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. There is.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach A has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). From time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. As the CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time ti15 and time ti24, and for 210 msec between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, but at time ti15 and time ti24, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W7 is designated for 1000 msec from time ti36 to time ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the 1 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the promotion part of reach A in the second half of SP, Yume-chan and Jam-chan incite whether or not they will catch Bakuchu in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). In response to the effect, the frame lamp lights up in white. At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, the reach is without operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains illuminated in white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the decision (timing of decision). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38, and furthermore, "FDC" is specified for the data of the last RGB of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. Similarly, "FDC" is designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the production control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the brightness data of "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the brightness data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 and outputs the brightness data of "FDC" to the LED driver. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to proceed by using simpler ramp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the production control CPU 120 creates a production in which Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, confront Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the lamp on the left side of the frame is lit in white, which corresponds to Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame is lit in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Make the left lamp blink. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 displays a frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i4). flash. At time ti5, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the reach A incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan by making it correspond to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 90 (i21). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Further, at time ti32 and time ti34, the production control CPU 120 controls the color of the character corresponding to the character in the case where the character has dialogue as shown in FIG. 94 (i32) and FIG. 95 (i34) but there is no subtitle. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 94 (i32) and Figure 95 (i34), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to effects such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tj4 and time tj5. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp display a symbol in correspondence with a production that produces a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and the frame lamp lights up in response to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tk1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). Light the lamp in a white color darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 100 (k4). .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of SP reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach B has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach B in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time At time tn14, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD12 can be used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec period of time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, and the 210 msec period of time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, At time tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, in response to the effect of inciting whether or not to catch a crab in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen confront a crab located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the reach B incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the performance in which Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, the performance control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is dialogue of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitles. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the second half of SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the crab-catching performance shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the win/fail branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to make the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. 110 (o2) to 111 (o5) serve as store signs, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a pattern in response to a performance that produces winning symbols as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7). Flashes in a bright white color that corresponds to the current state.

At time to8, which is the last part of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, Jam-chan and Nana-chan make the caught crab work as a signboard for the shop. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to match the effect. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tp1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 can respond to a performance in which the crab fails to be caught as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to light the frame lamp white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, so that the player can conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tp2 and time tp3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and (p3). Light the frame lamp in a white color darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach promotion part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the SP final reach promotion part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect Information specifying child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced when controlling the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining examples of child tables for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp, the time of the SP final reach promotion part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of the SP final reach, thereby clearly informing the player that the SP final reach has been reached. Can be done.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it possible for the player to place the player on the screen indicating that the SP has reached the final reach. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and time tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time tr19 and time At time tr22, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tr15, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD15 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach are all different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using a common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple timings, the data capacity used for ramp control is reduced in multiple reach effects, You can vary the time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tr36 and for 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, but at time tr36, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the SP final reach promotion part, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing separate grandchild tables at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the lamp, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. When the information to execute the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and when the information to execute the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is designated at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only the R data is initially changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightnesses is specified, then data showing various brightnesses is specified only for R data at intervals of 20 msec, and finally, various brightnesses are specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 to light the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only G data is first changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, then data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally, various brightness is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128 (r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter any lines and no subtitles are displayed. Furthermore, the frame lamp that is the target of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance in the SP final reach continues to be the target of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap between the two makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being stored away or from being misunderstood. Furthermore, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is in the same frame as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use lamps, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the target of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in performance and other SP final reach performances use frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, and board left lamp 9B, are used for button display and cut-in effects, and other SP final reach effects. The object of lamp control may be common in that point, or the object of lamp control may be common in that all game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec of time tr49 and time tr50, grandchild table W9 is designated. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

In the time period tr51 to tr54, which is the last part of the promotion part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, it is possible to correspond to effects that encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). , the frame lamp blinks in red. During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W10, and the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD15 becomes 0. The frame lamp continues blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, in the correctness branch in the SP final reach incitement part, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54). In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of promoting operations for the player at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

Here, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and SP second half reach B. When the operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is not performed, such as the child table WD12 used in the inciting part, the frame lamp is displayed at the final success/fail branch of the inciting part. It remains lit white and then moves to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, is shown in FIG. 130 (r47). As shown in Figure 130 (r48), after the white flashing is performed to encourage whether or not the ally character will capture Bakuchu, the display alternates between Bakuchu and the ally character, as shown in Figure 130 (r48). After the frame lamp lights up in red in response to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is activated based on the grandchild table W9. The frame lamp lights up in red in response to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail situation, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp illuminated in white, the effect can be created as if the effect had stopped. can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure. Furthermore, in the SP final reach where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the brightness data (RGB data) is changed to "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision can be suitably expressed by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character utters lines, the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and a Bakushu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame flashes in white, corresponding to the six friendly characters, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white. In addition, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to the Bakushu, in response to the performance where the Bakushu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Make the right lamp blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. There is.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in blue corresponding to Maid A in response to a performance in which Maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33) and FIG. 126 (r35), when a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), while the characters have dialogue, subtitles are Even if there is no such character, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory movement used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for accessory movements used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the accessory action part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, grandchild table W18 is specified during 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) to fall after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). In response to the effect, the frame lamp flashes in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , information specifying child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that as the ornaments shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rise, it appears as if a bomb has been caught. The frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory in accordance with the performance in which the display appears.

During times ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to control the frame lamp in response to the performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the SP final reach epilogue part, the time of the symbol display part in the SP final reach epilogue part is divided into small parts for the frame lamp. At the same time, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time ts8 and time ts9. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and the frame lamp lights up in response to an effect such that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings. , it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, while enlivening each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where objects fall, the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, when an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow color is lit without any achromatic colors, and the player is calmly congratulated on winning the jackpot. be able to. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the lose-lose epilogue used for the lose-lose epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during 200 msec of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which Bakushu runs away as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). to light the frame lamp white.

The red blinking in the win/fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". Thereby, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss.

During 3900 msec of time tr2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the performance in which six ally characters lose and are disappointed, as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as child table WD17 of SP final reach. Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 137 (u3). .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for frame lamps in the one brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red in response to the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139(v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 specified last in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is changed to the lighting mode at the beginning of the child table WD18 used in the case of a rescue. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp lights up brighter than in the state after the loss notification, so that depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification can be easily understood by the player. I can show you.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a loss is reported, the frame lamp is lit once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, and furthermore, when a rescue is successful, the frame lamp is lit even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue effect. there were. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified, and "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). may be done. As a result, at the end of a losing game, the frame lamp turns off in white. Further, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white range at the beginning when the rescue is successful after the failure notification. In this way, at the time of winning the rescue, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can be used to prevent the loss. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown more easily to the player.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is designated. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the white-out performance shown in FIG. 139(v2).

Grandchild table W4 is designated between 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to the symbol presentation shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last part of the rescue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the confirmation of a hit, corresponding to the design presentation shown in FIG. 140 (v5). . At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the maximum time for each game effect lamp 9 to be Information specifying child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, there are prepared a child table that is used before the symbol starts moving, and a child table that is used after the symbol starts moving. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the symbol begins to move. For example, from time tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery performance is started, the symbols are changed by the re-lottery performance, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8). Before it starts moving, turn off the frame lamp.

In this way, once the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to an effect in which the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect, so depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect. This can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219(b) shows a child table used after the symbol starts moving. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is designated. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to the performance in which the "2" symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). Make the frame lamp flash red.

During times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. has been done. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) that change at high speed while switching symbols, Make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

(Brightness data table used when symbols are promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "3" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "3" symbol as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) in a reduced size and in normal size, A frame lamp is made to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the symbol "3" is displayed in a swaying manner and then the symbol is confirmed.

It should be noted that the rainbow color blinking due to the lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting due to the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, from time tB5 to tB9, the rainbow color flashes more intensely than the smooth lighting. From time tB5 to tB9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp will continue to flash in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow is used in the same way as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. The frame lamp lights up with the color, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color blinks from time tB5 to tB9, and once in the winning epilogue part, the "2" symbol is displayed. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that would occur if the symbol was temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect after the lights are turned off, and the symbols are displayed in a swaying manner, the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data on grandchild table W19) is used to change the color to a smooth rainbow color. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp flashes in red. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the ``3'' symbol shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) is displayed in a swaying manner and then the symbol is confirmed. This makes it easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing rainbow color when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be changed during the period when the symbol is confirmed as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "2" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to create a performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed in a swaying manner as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) and then the symbol is finalized. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the . From time tC5 to tC9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp will remain lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the lights go out, and then the symbols start moving by re-drawing effect, and the symbols are displayed as shaking. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data (for example, RGB data in grandchild tables W19 and W20) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the "2" symbol is promoted by the re-drawing and replaced with the "3" symbol, the rainbow color lighting from time tB5 to tB9 means that the "2" symbol is not promoted from the "2" symbol by the re-lottery and is replaced by the "3" symbol. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color from time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol is maintained. As a result, if the winning symbol is promoted in the re-drawing, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-drawing, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol will be promoted in the re-drawing. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using a common grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part.

Also, as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9), after the "2" symbol has finished appearing, the "2" symbol becomes the normal size and the design is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, the designer can easily decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow color lighting when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be continued during the symbol confirmation period as shown in FIGS. 163 (C8) and (C9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. By performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the lights.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to correspond to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. Turn it on in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and is referenced when controlling the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referred to in a predetermined time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, various brightness values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Data is sparsely specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the accessory lamp grandchild table Y1, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The production control CPU 120 lights up the accessory lamp 9A in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data output to the board left lamp 9B. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1, thereby lighting the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and data is output to the power lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be displayed, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Accessory object action red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the red blinking luminance data table for accessory motion. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2 to cause the frame lamp to blink in red.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White blinking (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (white light on), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various brightnesses is specified for only R data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W5e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances for only R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e), thereby lighting or blinking the panel left lamp 9B in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. Or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child table that is referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only the G data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only the G data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W6e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various luminances is specified at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. Or blink.

[Agitation brightness data table when no operation promotion is performed]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unprompted operation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Agitation brightness data table with operation promotion]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to light the frame lamp in red.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 outputs the lamp data based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling it, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red while decreasing the brightness in stages.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to light the frame lamp in red.

[Loss luminance data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the lost brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the per-relief brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in red.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Confirmed hit brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18 to cause the frame lamp to blink in seven colors.

[Re-lottery performance brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background brightness data table]
FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, the child tables in the background brightness data table include grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Regarding brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized by performance content.

FIGS. 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the accessory movement in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) The frame lamp flashes in seven colors to correspond to the effect of falling objects.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the accessories shown in FIG. 173 (s3-2) to FIG. 174 (s3-8) rise and the explosion Corresponding to the appearance of a display that looks like it has been caught, the frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory.

During the time period ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to productions that produce winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern appearance.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the production in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5), and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table to turn off the light. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), Before the design begins to move due to the effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby supporting effects such as the reduction of the "2" symbol as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). to make the frame lamp blink in red.

During times tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby supporting performances in which the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46). to make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), A frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation performance in which the pattern "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby finalizing the symbol after the "2" symbol as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is displayed in a swaying manner. In response to this kind of effect, the frame lamps are lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that the effect is temporarily displayed before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table to adjust the frame lamp in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). Lights up in a fanfare lighting mode.

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and uses the child table to Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a specified grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-drawing part when the symbols are not promoted is illustrated, but if the symbols are changed from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part, As for the child tables leading to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each production part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. There is.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to know when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red, etc. The brightness data changes so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, but from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained to ensure lighting. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
Figure 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), As shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. /The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(Inciting 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character, and when the character utters lines, the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

(Inciting 17)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, there are multiple tables that are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is possible while reducing the data capacity used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. You can change the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

(Instigation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inciting part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, the number of white flashes can be varied while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) uses the frame lamp at the same location as the lamp control in the SP final reach inciting part. designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(True or false 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white to give the player the impression that the performance has stopped. It is possible to clearly convey to the player the win/fail branch (timing of decision). On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

(True or false 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(True or false 17)
In the child table WD15 at the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), the frame lamp is displayed while the sound corresponding to operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of encouraging operations for the player at the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

(True or false 20)
In child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to child table WD17 of SP final reach, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

(True or false 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the last specified grandchild table W26 in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the first specified grandchild of the child table WD18 used in the case of rescue is determined. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on table W16, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) and even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and The subsequent relief winning notification can be shown more easily to the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 gradually moves the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending movement of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A, and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so as to turn it off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to create a rainbow colored table without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of multiple timings that are different from each other. While reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on, it is possible to enhance each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off. After being turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that it is possible to clearly inform the player that the re-lottery performance is to be started by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights turned off, and when the symbols are oscillating, the re-lottery effect is executed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Re-lottery performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. It will be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. However, when the "2" symbol is promoted to the "3" symbol due to the re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB7 to tB9, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops during the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation regarding lamp control>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned lamp control, characteristic parts that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps when winning and when losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, lamp control in the event of a loss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing). Further, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the frame lamp flashes in red in response to the effect of winning or failing (deciding timing).

After that, in the loss epilogue part via the instigation part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B, SP second half reaches A and B, and SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white in response to a performance in which an ally character loses in a ready-to-win performance after a win/fail decision.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W13, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a darker white color than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13 in response to the effect that the ally character is disappointed in. let

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W14, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the final 600000 msec (10 minutes ), "111" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 which was also used in the previous example. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that normally corresponds to the background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before the reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case where the game moves to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a performance in which an ally character wins.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W19, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified for this. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, thereby causing the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, " 333'' is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to cause the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance such as a falling accessory.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W20, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to light up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263 will be described below.

(True or false 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the objects fall, the frame lamp is lamp controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and the achromatic color ("333'' RGB data) and the frame lamp lights up alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

(About the shaking pattern of the pattern)
Here, the manner in which the symbols swing will be explained in detail using FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the symbols swing. During the symbol fluctuation period in the above-mentioned inciting part and re-lottery part, the decorative symbols move in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(a) or in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(b). It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located lower than the first mode.

Moreover, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated clockwise about the center of the vertical axis so that the decorative pattern is oriented more to the left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated counterclockwise about the center of the decorative pattern as a vertical axis, so that the decorative pattern is in a position facing rightward more than in the first mode.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using 7 symbols. Moreover, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the symbols are enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Thereafter, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size from (D8) to (D9).

Thereafter, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" changes rapidly, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Similar high-speed fluctuations are repeated after (D20).

As shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect as shown in FIG. 265(B), the symbol feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery effects. be. Here, the re-lottery effects include a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols become odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 symbols to 7 symbols. There is a performance. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, after which the symbol is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbols after the end of the symbol feeding period, After that, the design is finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is no swinging period of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, and the symbol is determined as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the symbol feeding period is constant, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the symbol confirmation absorbs the time even when the button is pressed. . Such a relationship holds true even when the button operation is performed in any of the first re-lottery performances to the third re-lottery performances.

[About re-lottery effects 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, no matter at which timing the button is operated in the scene of deciding whether or not the result is correct, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, if the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role object movement and winning epilogue part will be executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) will be executed. A pattern is drawn. Thereafter, after 5 seconds during the symbol swing period, the three symbols will be in a state facing forward as shown in (K5).

In addition, if the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K2), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 4 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols are in a state facing leftward from the front as shown in (K6). In addition, if the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K3), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and as shown in (K4). The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 3 seconds during the symbol swing period, the three symbols will be in a state where they are facing to the right from the front, as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing, After the symbol swing period, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. A lottery performance is executed. Then, after (K17), a symbol feeding effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, although the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect will be executed thereafter. In the time until the predetermined timing, a time period may be provided for the symbols to absorb the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols, and it is possible to suitably present a series of performances.

(Re-lottery performance 27)
From the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reaches may be the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 28)
The movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

(Re-lottery performance 29)
The plurality of SP reaches include those for which no prompting for operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, the same re-lottery effect as in the SP reach where a difference in length occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of whether there is a difference in length or not. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery presentation.

[About re-lottery effects 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is performed at an early timing after the movement promotion display is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, symbols are put out in the same way no matter which timing the button is operated during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance. After that, the decorative pattern moves in the same way across the whiteout, and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), if the button is operated immediately after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols are displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols are displayed. is the normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols are in a state where they face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

In addition, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L1), the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Become. Also, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L2), the three symbols are in a state facing forward as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing right after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing In this case, the symbol may be in a position facing forward after the symbol oscillation period. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. is executed. Thereafter, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of shaking of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, but the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 21)
In a modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner after notification of whether or not to be promoted is performed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing a whiteout as a common performance, a performance different from the previous pattern is performed in which the swinging decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is oscillated during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of presentation until the pattern stops can be adjusted. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

(Re-lottery performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swinging period, the symbol swings to the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

<Main composition and effects>
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, an accessory, a movable body 32),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an incitement part) in which the validity of whether or not the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced, and a validity notification part (for example, the winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. (a win/fail notification part that notifies you of a jackpot by moving a role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a win epilogue part) that is executed after the win/fail notification and when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state. It consists of
In the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means makes it difficult to visually recognize the performance display by giving priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action over the performance display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part. state, and then performs a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body moves from the first position (e.g., the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (for example, advance position) (for example, the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
Displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and terminating the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; A display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, the decorative pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area (for example, Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as an incitement part, the character who first speaks a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the incitement part to the success/failure notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display that prompts you to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the incitement part, so that the effect display of the incitement part becomes invisible, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the inciting part become visible (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introduction image gives an impact, and since the introduction image changes to the image of the trigger button, the performance of the inciting part can be confirmed, thereby making it possible to excite the players. In addition, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled during the flow of the performance, which becomes the background display for the epilogue part until the evacuation of the accessory is completed. In addition, since the symbols are enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitles has finished in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbols and to prevent the player from mistaking it as a message for displaying the symbols. In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, subtitles are properly added to the slow-paced epilogue part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Furthermore, in the fast-paced inciting part, the content can be primarily conveyed through video switching, and auxiliary subtitles can be displayed so as not to disturb the video development. Thereby, a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second re-drawing of the plurality of types of re-lottery performances in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and in the second half part, the second symbol is displayed repeatedly. It is possible to perform a third re-lottery effect that is displayed again,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance, and the third re-lottery performance have the same performance length,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or substantially the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. Note that the images of the pattern portion including the background may be made completely the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the first symbol is displayed by changing the display mode to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it is shaking;
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
If the action is performed at a first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, when a predetermined timing has come after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance has been executed. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode;
When performing the action promotion display in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, after performing the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol changes to the third mode when the predetermined timing comes;
When performing the movement promotion display in the first re-lottery performance, the shaking display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes in the second mode when
If the action is performed at the second timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol assumes the third mode when
When performing the movement promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the shaking display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a shaking manner, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop displaying one symbol in the first mode,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where dialogue sounds emitted by characters are output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's actions. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the display, display the scene corresponding to the scene after switching, and
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the movable body movable luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the SP first half reach performance by the movement of the accessory. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object may be displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the accessory movement part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the accessory is rising. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP during the ascending of the accessory, the inciting part of the first half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to prompt a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific action, but displays a display that encourages success or failure;
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, first video data is used,
In the second scene, second video data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. It is executed using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode after a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller;
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the performance that is being performed is made visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is displayed once, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first symbol,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, there is a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the displayed timing, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The performance execution means is configured to perform a transition from an epilogue part to a re-lottery part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. The first symbol is visually recognized both when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner. perform a specific display that makes it difficult, display the first symbol in a common display mode, and execute the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and thereafter, the display of the first serif subtitle is finished, and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state, and an introduction part after the notification is made as to whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state. and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is in the advantageous state,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or non-control. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled by the advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
when the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
when the background display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. and is used to control the light emitting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , performs a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced design is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body moves, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the performance after switching to a state in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves and effects are displayed before reaching a specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed production, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable object.

Specifically, an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes the use of accessories.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode through a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
Occlusion display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller, the brightness of the effect display decreases,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shielding display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end of the screen toward the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above closes from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the production display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the shielding display undergoes a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and while the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed. , the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

[Start 9]
When the operation of releasing the shield display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off,
After the release operation of the shielding display is completed and one frame worth of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully opened is determined by the lighting state of the frame lamp. It can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing operation of the shielding display is started, and the closing operation ends at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered first before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It has become. Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is capable of performing a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by changing to a closed mode through a closing operation, and is made visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode. can be,
The occlusion display is executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for shielding display when performing shielding display,
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data changes when the shielding display performs the closing operation, and the brightness data is configured so that the brightness data does not change during the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until it performs the opening operation. It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed in the start part, the shielding display performs a closing action, and then the shielding display performs a releasing action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is impossible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the operation of releasing the shielded display is completed.

Specifically, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is released. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at a timing other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) suggesting a change in active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing when the closing operation of the shielding display ends, the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the closing operation of the shielding display ends, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period after the shielding display changes to the closed mode until a release operation is performed, or until the shielding display changes to the closed mode and a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform an action. This is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the shielding display is in a closed mode and the promotion display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the brightness data that is changed, and after the promotion display is performed, the brightness data is switched again to the brightness data that is maintained.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. Then, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained.Lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, while the shutter display is in the closed mode. At the timing when the promotion display is performed, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a changing brightness data table, and the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table. After that, after the promotion display is performed ( In the state in which the promotion display continues, lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained, so that the player will not be able to play the next performance after the shutter display is in the open mode. It can make it easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display that includes a button image and promotion characters that encourage the player to perform an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to perform an action (for example, a sound saying "Press") is output, and characters prompting the player to perform a motion (for example, "Press") are displayed. good. Further, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting a player's action. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's action, the player's motion changes depending on the sound prompting the player's motion and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display encouraging the player to more effectively perform the action corresponding to the promotion display.

[Instigation 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the propriety of being controlled to an advantageous state is announced,
It includes scenes where the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes where friendly characters receive damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display switches is greater than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned inciting part, which incites the right or wrong, was updated as friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.) . In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Instigation 2]
In the introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

[Instigation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be long.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in other scenes of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

[Instigation 4]
There are scenes where the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

[Instigation 5]
The first introduction part may be expanded to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active role in both the first and second introduction parts,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A, SP first half reach B as the first inciting part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second inciting part executed at the timing of the second half. There was a second half reach A, a SP second half reach B, and a SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

[Instigation 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active role,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active role,
In the first introduction part, the first character's dialogue sound is first output, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introduction part, the second character's dialogue sound is first output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the inciting part mentioned above, Yumu-chan's character plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of SP, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of SP. There were scenes where the characters played an active role. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

[Inciting 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where dialogue sounds emitted by characters are output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's actions. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Figures 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 8]
In a scene where a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the previous scene is Control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than that shown in FIG. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[Inciting 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. As shown in Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), even if the character has dialogue but no subtitles, the color corresponding to the character The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is changed, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is configured so as not to change,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to a dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is not changed, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is changed.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character utters lines, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the color. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

[Instigation 11]
When the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scenes where the first character's dialogue sound is output and the second character's dialogue sound is output. , the serif subtitles are displayed in a certain font and at a certain position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there is a scene where each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

[Instigation 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

[Inciting 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, movement sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the production performed in the introduction part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output along with a display corresponding to the performance performed in the introduction part, and the volumes of the various sounds are adjusted.

Specifically, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Instigation 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are outputted in a manner that overlaps with each other, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

[Instigation 15]
When the screen is viewed from the front, if the output of the dialogue sound of the first character who is far away overlaps with the output of the action sound of the second character who is closer, the volume of the dialogue sound will be higher than the volume of the action sound. The volume has been adjusted so that it becomes louder.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character who is far away from the player overlaps with the physical sound from which the player has a closer sense of distance, the sound is adjusted so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easy to convey to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Instigation 16]
The volume of dialogue sound for which subtitles are not displayed differs between when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are not displayed, and when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitle display is performed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound used to display subtitles is louder than that of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a difference between the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound does not have subtitles. When there are subtitles, the sound is adjusted to be louder by lowering the volume of SP Reach's BGM. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[Inciting 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, by controlling the lamp to vary the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing the data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While blinking in white, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be made two or three times by changing the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 using the lamp control between multiple different timings. Can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach. , instead of preparing separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W3, reducing the amount of data used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. At the same time, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

[Inciting 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Inciting 21]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. Then,
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitles display period overlaps with the second subtitles displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

[Instigation 22]
In an exciting scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When one character's dialogue sound is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and then when the other character's dialogue sound is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the part where the first subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and then when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the first subtitle is displayed. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

[Inciting 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, and a fade effect is applied to at least one of them, they are not output,
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so that they overlap, and a fade effect is added. It will not be output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

[Inciting 24]
In an advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When switching from displaying the first subtitle to displaying the second subtitle in lyrics display, no fade effect is applied to the display of any subtitle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the work of adding a fade effect during the jackpot round, and it is possible to make a series of performances look good.

[Inciting 25]
In both the introduction part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sounds may overlap,
The proportion of dialogue sounds that overlap is higher in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the inciting part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the inciting part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[Instigation 26]
Even in certain scenes where subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when subtitles are displayed or when the subtitles disappear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

[Inciting 27]
The display of the first subtitle without a fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be swapped,
It may be possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this may create a sense of discomfort if long dialogue sounds or fast-paced dialogue sounds are output. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means are
In the introduction part, a promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. . According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

[True or false 1]
In the success/failure reporting part,
The player is informed as to whether or not the game is controlled to be advantageous;
A promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
It is executed between the introduction part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

[True or false 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introductory display of the promotion display while the development display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the development display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the development display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the subtitles corresponding to the operating means are displayed. Due to the screen, the performance that was being performed is no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

[True or false 3]
The expanded display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

[True or false 4]
The expanded display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail moves slightly every time the image of Bakuchu changes. was. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progression of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[True or false 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, the expansion display progresses more slowly than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

[True or false 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

[True or false 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was being displayed while the expansion display was being performed before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[True or false 8]
The introduction part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success/failure notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data,
During the slow motion period, an effect is added to one piece of image data to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

[True or false 9]
There is a production that includes an introduction part where friendly characters and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introduction part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed alternate.
It is possible to move to the final part by performing an action by the player while the promotion display is being displayed during a predetermined period.
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed gradually increases, and the promotion display is performed after the speed becomes the fastest.
Even in the depiction of scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed, each of the enemies and allies is reproduced in one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

[True or false 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed are alternately applied to scenes in which a reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect.

Specifically, the effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

[True or false 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or false 12]
During the slow motion period, a portion of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes is the same as that of periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

[True or false 13]
In the period before moving from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to encourage a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a promotion display that prompts a specific action, but displays a display that encourages correctness or disapproval.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

[True or false 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display changes in the following order: a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is valid or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and the timing of (i39) is Now, one image is displayed while remaining still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

[True or false 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined brightness data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. . Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[True or false 16]
When a promotion display is performed, the display changes in the order of a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of a moving image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether it is correct or not. do.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introduction image is such that the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. be. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is successful or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

[True or false 17]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when promoting display is performed is as follows.
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the performance that encourages the player to operate at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

[True or false 18]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display indicating that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scenes shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

[True or false 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set lower in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data in the inciting part ( While the RGB data) is "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

[True or false 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect, and the first notification effect to notify that the control is to be in the advantageous state is to notify whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until it is controlled, and an epilogue part in which it is announced that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The first notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part that informs you of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. Consisting of parts,
The second notification effect that notifies the user that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part in which it is announced whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a part that announces that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an epilogue part and an epilogue part.
The second notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part that informs you of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. Consisting of parts,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The brightness data table includes a first notification effect brightness data table, a second notification effect brightness data table, and a specific brightness data table,
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the introduction part of the second notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a second notification effect brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a third upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a fourth upper table and a specific brightness data table,
A specific brightness data table used in an epilogue part in a first notification performance that notifies that the control will not be in the advantageous state, and a specific brightness data table that is used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not in the advantageous state. is a common brightness data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for the first time,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are also child tables of SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

[True or false 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state is as follows:
a first pattern including an introduction part in which it is reported whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state; and a first epilogue part in which it is reported that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
An introduction part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the control is not in the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is executed in the advantageous state. a second pattern including a relief notification part in which it is notified that the control will be performed;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
In the relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set higher in brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state, an image of the situation where it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state is displayed, and a decorative pattern notifies the user of the decision that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed, and the image is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss pattern is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of loss, the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the medium symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means displays the decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so that it becomes clearer in stages, and displays the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so that it becomes darker in stages, Displaying a display notifying that the control is not carried out in the advantageous state;
The number of stages in which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is displayed in a darker manner is greater than the number of stages in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a clearer manner.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Loss 4]
Blacking out of the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state is performed earlier than fading in of the middle design of the decorative design.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background blacks out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change,
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled in an advantageous state for blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only a part of the image moves slightly.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state blacks out, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fades in. As a result, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, and the 1 required for blackout. The period in which the transmittance of each image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period,
In a predetermined period, the pattern itself oscillates for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium symbol image changes from a state of 100% transmittance to a state of 0% transmittance, and longer than a period during which switching display is performed.

Specifically, at the time of a loss, the background blacked out and the medium symbol faded in, resulting in a medium symbol with a transmittance of 0%, as shown in (X18) to (X20). A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

[Lose 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information regarding the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWER FULII" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. The image will be displayed. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in an advantageous state is an introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and an introductory part that is carried out after the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state. a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the state is controlled;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in an advantageous state is the introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the introductory part that is carried out after the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which it is announced that it is not controlled by
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that it is not controlled to an advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production,
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When a symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the lighting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. It is used to control the light emitting means for production.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is a loop that references brightness data until the change conditions are met.
In the introduction part, the brightness data corresponding to the background is not used, but the brightness data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table will respond to changes such as SP reach when certain change conditions are met, such as when SP reach develops. After that, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach brightness data table. In this case, while the SP reach effect is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, switching of brightness data in the background brightness data table will stop over time. Continue without any trouble. In addition, lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, and from then on, the error brightness Lamp control is performed based on the data table. In this case, in the error state, switching of the luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table. Thereby, a series of effects to be executed can be shown more suitably.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background will be used even if a pattern confirmation command is received, and after that, even if a customer waiting command is received when there is no hold. The brightness data table corresponding to the background continues to be used.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. It is used as According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the special pattern's light emitting means stops,
By receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the light emitting means of the special figure will blink,
By receiving the next variation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is a trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled by the advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means includes:
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display,
Controlling the light emitting means by continuously using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the background display is performed;
Controlling the light emitting means by continuously using the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display when the stop display of the symbol is performed;
When the variable display of symbols is started, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the variable display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from (X40) where six ally characters are disappointed to (X41) where the background image is blacked out. . The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

[Loss 14]
The final brightness data is lights-off data, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part does not include brightness data that maintains lights-off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the symbol is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

[Loss 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect for notifying that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a first part in which it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state. Consisting of 1 epilogue part,
The notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until you are notified of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue in which you will be notified that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. Consisting of parts,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled;
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
The light emission control means includes:
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display,
Switching the brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher than the final brightness data (lights off) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). It has become. According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is higher than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Accessory action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Accessory action 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the accessory falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and , achromatic color (RGB data of "333") and the frame lamp are lit alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to control the advantageous state is announced, and there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the ally character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the same as the introduction part. There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the above-mentioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes a scene where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the characters' lines is higher than at the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue in the epilogue part. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, if dialogue sounds are output in a scene where an enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the inciting part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There is a first introduction part and a second introduction part, and each has a different development and number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the output of the character's dialogue sound is different from that in the introduction part. This is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialogue sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reaches, which are inciting parts, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the incitement part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is displayed.
The movable body moves according to an evacuation pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body switches to an epilogue display by the time the evacuation pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, it is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinguishing.

Specifically, when the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 adjusts the role based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

[Epilogue 10]
The change is suggested by BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue being started. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and sound effects suggesting the change are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in a situation where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is display subtitles while outputting. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of the evacuation of the movable object,
When the movable body is completely retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the symbol display is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from mistaking it as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the final symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background are It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that is played before the drawing of the symbols begins is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added while standing still.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the display is finished, a display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable object has retreated to the first position, a dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission unit when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the success/failure decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, the first scene displays dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character,
In the epilogue part, a second scene in which a final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then, after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area; There is,
A switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitles ends in the second scene, while a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitles ends in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
When drawing out symbols in the re-lottery part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed when the symbols are produced in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-drawing part, the small symbols are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and in conjunction with the transition to the re-drawing part, the small symbols change again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when displaying a pattern, even if both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are once displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be changed again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The epilogue part is
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In a second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the first scene of the epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and at a specific timing, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is changed to a luminance data table for making a rainbow light emission mode. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for switching and rainbow light emitting mode;
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display, and rainbow light is emitted from the brightness data table for enlarged display at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table to set the mode;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common brightness data table. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of a brightness data table for making a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used during the win notification presentation and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of multiple different timings. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, and to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the re-lottery result is announced.
The light emission control means includes:
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene, and at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene is controlled. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for creating a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and the re-lottery is performed at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative symbol. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode from a brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table for enlarged display of a result notification scene, and storage destination data of a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then, grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying a decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the upper left corner of the screen) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the edge of the display area,
In relation to the timing at which the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Enlarge the display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introduction part, a decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second symbol that displays the first symbol again in the second half part after displaying the first symbol in the first half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 2]
When the image corresponding to the background that temporarily stops the arrangement of decorative symbols is displayed, the light emitting means turns off, and when moving to the re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, Once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that it can be clearly communicated to the player that the re-lottery performance is to be started by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the arrangement of decorative symbols,
When temporarily stopped, the decorative patterns are displayed shaking with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are regenerated. Switch to one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image of concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

[Re-lottery performance 4]
At the start of symbol feeding, the decorative symbols that had been displayed since the epilogue are reduced.
After reducing the size, the pattern feed starts.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 5]
The symbol feeding starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols become uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the following order: movement promotion display, movement acceptance, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery performance, the symbols are moved by the reduced size decorative symbols. is executed, and a button operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

[Re-lottery performance 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the control will be in the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect in which a replacement display is performed in the first half of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half. is executable,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half until the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half to the display of the first symbol in the second half,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 8]
The symbol feed according to a predetermined pattern is to send the temporarily stopped symbol to the next symbol in order, and after the last symbol is sent, return to the temporarily stopped symbol again, and then move to the next symbol in order. It is a performance that seems to send to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". , again, all the decorative patterns are sent in order, ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', ``1''. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

[Re-lottery performance 9]
While the symbols are being fed in a predetermined pattern, all of the sent decorative symbols are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

[Re-lottery performance 10]
After the symbol feed is started, the display time of each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until notification of whether or not to promote is made.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". However, each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 11]
The motion promotion display is performed during symbol feeding,
The motion promotion display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

[Re-lottery performance 12]
The movement promotion display is started during symbol feeding, and is started during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding effect. Begins. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

[Re-lottery performance 13]
When symbol feeding starts from the symbol "1", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When symbol feeding is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, at the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, a second re-lottery effect that performs the replacement display in the first half of multiple types of re-lottery effects and displays the first symbol again in the second half. is executable,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, a repeated display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the third re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance have the same length,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 15]
The re-lottery effect displays a combination of display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, and reproduces each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data for each re-lottery performance, the length of the performance is common between each re-lottery performance, and only the type of symbol sent and the symbol issued in each re-lottery performance are the same. The lottery performance is different.

Specifically, in the lottery performance, there is a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed. Common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) or a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols). In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or almost the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the symbol is displayed to when it is enlarged and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

[Re-lottery performance 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern arrangement before the re-lottery is executed, and when notifying whether or not the decorative pattern arrangement will be promoted in the notification part,
By combining the common display data and display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a display of a plurality of types of pattern placement is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

[Re-lottery performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out symbols is the same when the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when notification is made that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is not promoted in the re-lottery.

Specifically, the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part has the same lamp control as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. Grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery performance 20]
In the event that you are promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is different between when the arrangement of decorative symbols temporarily stops before the re-lottery is executed and when the notification that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is carried out.
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is more intense when notification that the arrangement of decorative symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is given than when the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. , the frame lamp lights up, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, once the "2" symbol is lit in the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that occurs when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period is reached, the first symbol will be shaken by changing the display mode of the first symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it were
After the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is swayed by changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. Performs a shaking display that displays the second symbol as if it were
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The means of performing the performance is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
If the action is performed at the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second Displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the predetermined timing will be displayed after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode when
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the second symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. stop display,
If the action is performed at the first timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
If the action is performed at the second timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in a third mode,
When the movement promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the first symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. stop display,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the promotion or not is announced, the decorative pattern will be displayed flickering until the predetermined timing of the change comes.
When the action is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action will be performed at the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change is reached after the promotion or not is announced. Decorative patterns will be displayed flickering in proportion to the speed of the game, and the time will be absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying (FIG. 267 (L3) example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while flashing in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern is performed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is shaken during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of the presentation until the symbol stops is changed. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

[Re-lottery performance 24]
In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position,
In the shaking display, the decorative patterns are displayed in the following order: 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. The predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative symbols are always displayed swinging in the order of the second position, first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings toward the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings toward the front from (J13) to (J14). changes to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery performance 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to cause the light emitting means to emit rainbow light at the start of a predetermined performance.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

[Re-lottery performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when displaying the first symbol, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing, and there are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The production execution means performs a re-drawing from the epilogue part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and when moving from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. Both when transitioning to the part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode, perform a specific display that makes the first symbol difficult to see, Displaying the first symbol in a common display mode and executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

[Re-lottery performance 27]
No matter which one of the multiple types of introduction parts wins, the re-lottery effect is the same.

Specifically, from the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the plurality of reaches may be the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative pattern was once swayed and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

[Re-lottery performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state and is not notified due to the operation of the operating means,
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is determined that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no shake in the display, but the same re-lottery effect is performed as in the reach where the length is off.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reaches include those for which no promotion of operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery performance 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery performance after the shaking display of the decorative symbols at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery presentation.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Below, some terms used in this specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

"Fluctuation" of symbols includes the updated display of multiple types of symbols, such as multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and Scroll display, transformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, lighting/blinking/turning off of lamps (fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, etc.) Including.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

A "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which a decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced symbols are stopped and displayed, the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols at the edge of the screen.

The "small design" includes a design corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design that is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative design. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction.

"Design confirmation" means that the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, and decorative symbols, etc., which were fluctuating, stop, and finally the special symbol game This includes determining the design in . For example, the state in which the fluctuations of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the right decorative symbol display area 5R have stopped. include.

In the "symbol confirmation period", the display result is fixed by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, decorative symbols, etc. Including period. For example, the decorative patterns that change in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns that change in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns that change in the right decorative pattern display area 5R stop and are displayed. Includes a state in which the results are displayed definitively.

"Reach" means that when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the variable display of the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. For example, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the inside decorative pattern display area 5C This includes a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is still continuing.

"Lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to the brightness data corresponding to turning off the light, such as the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emission) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), such as "1" or "2". It may include a state where the value is close to "0". Note that a state where the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to "0", such as "1" or "2", is the brightness data corresponding to turning off the lamp, as " It may also be included in "lights on" or "slightly off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off, and the value of the brightness data is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is greater than or equal to the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to "lights out" described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and when the lamp is "on" and "off". This includes repeating the process over time. Furthermore, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "lighting up" and "substantially extinguishing" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, if the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is darkest), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the brightness data used for this is "F", lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest brightness (the lamp is brightest). As mentioned above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp becomes the largest. Note that the term "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the three light emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light due to the current applied to one light emitting element, thereby lighting up the LEDs in various colors. Note that the "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current; In the case of an LED consisting of only red light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

Among the lamp lighting colors, "rainbow colors" (seven colors) include colors made up of seven types of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the above-mentioned colors, but may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 256. In addition, the lighting mode using rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data.

The "color corresponding to the character" includes a color predetermined for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for the character Yumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the character Yumu-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. (emission color), the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakushu (emission color), etc.

The "line sounds" include sounds corresponding to the words that are output in synchronization with the timing at which the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utter the words. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to words uttered by the characters are outputted in accordance with images of characters appearing in the performance.

"Serif subtitles" include characters corresponding to the serif sounds displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sounds are output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds produced by the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) expressing the motion of the object is outputted in accordance with the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the performance.

The "character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, this includes the action of Yumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

The "re-lottery effect" is a temporary jackpot symbol that does not result in a variable probability jackpot in the variable display of decorative symbols (for example, an even number symbol such as a "2" symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol becomes a variable probability jackpot. It includes an effect that is executed before the symbol is determined in order to encourage whether or not the symbol will be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as a "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a performance included in the ``re-lottery performance'' and includes a display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, so that the decorative pattern is switched one after another. In this embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the "2" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, until the "2" or "3" symbol finally stops. include.

"Repeated display" refers to repeating the same display, and refers to repeating display using the same animation. This is a performance included in the "re-lottery performance" and includes a display in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is repeatedly displayed with the same animation. As an example, the "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, and finally the "7" symbol stops.

The "shaking display" is to display a decorative pattern while shaking it, indicating that the fluctuation is not finished but is in progress.

"Stop display" means to display the decorative pattern in a stationary state without moving it, and indicates that the variation has ended.

"Swinging speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position when it is displayed swinging.

The "first aspect of the design," the "second aspect of the design," and the "third aspect of the design" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative design. For example, when displaying a decorative pattern swinging up and down, if the first aspect is the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging in the front-back direction, when the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare performance" is a performance that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state to notify that the jackpot game state has entered.

"Advancement of a movable object (accessory object)" is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from its initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating" a movable object (accessory object) is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retracted position.

"Effect display for movable body movement" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the action of the accessory stand out in accordance with the action of the accessory when the reach develops in the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. That is, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to the groups that make up the production, and parts are larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided by role.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in display, particularly a change in the displayed background, characters, etc.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catch display)" is an effect that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal gaming. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

"Occupation display (shutter display)" means that the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image that was displayed before the occlusion display is displayed. This is a display that shields the In the shielding display, the image may be shielded by displaying something other than the shutter.

"The luminance data is switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp changes. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the storyline of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"The luminance data is not switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the brightness data does not change, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. Since the light emitting mode of the lamp is constant, it gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and has stopped.

"Video data" is data for displaying a video including animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to give the illusion of movement. The video data may be stored after being compressed.

"First video data" is video data that is created using many images in order to make a character move among the video data.

"Second video data" is video data that is created using a small number of images in order to make the character move among the video data.

"Movement of a specific character" refers to a motion corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

"Blackout" is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“Whiteout” is an effect in which a white image is displayed in the display area (whiteout) in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image entirely on the screen (whiteout), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, images showing dialogue are gradually displayed from a state in which a room background is displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually lowering the transparency of the image showing the dialogue and displaying it. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 100% transparency, the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second by decreasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds. Further, "fade out" is the opposite of "fade in", and means that a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping the background image gradually changes to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state in which an image showing lines is displayed on the room background, the image showing lines is gradually hidden. Gradually hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the lines. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with a transparency of 0%, by increasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds, the dialogue image becomes hidden after 1 second. Furthermore, the fade effect includes a cross-fade in which images are replaced by fading in and fading out at the same time.

<Example of time-saving control without going through hit>
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol), but in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). Thereby, the player does not feel a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You can also do this. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You can also do this. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
The rate at which information is displayed in the first epilogue part or the second epilogue part is higher than the rate at which information is displayed in the introduction part,
moreover,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 279, a group effect execution process shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. An example is a gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in a second situation (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 289 and 326).
According to this feature, the notification effect to be executed can be executed with suitable brightness control, and the interest is improved. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to more suitably perform group effects.

In other words, by setting different brightness depending on whether or not an advantageous state is controlled in the execution of the notification effect, a suitable effect is executed and a feeling of expectation for an advantageous condition is created, and at the same time, during the first display period, From the first situation in which a part of the character displayed in the first situation is displayed, the part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and the part of the character displayed second is displayed. After entering the second situation, a new character is displayed during the second display period, which is longer than the first display period, and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end. By eliminating the situation in which only the characters are displayed, it is possible to reliably convey to the players that it is a group performance, and the start and continuation of the group performance can be suitably executed to improve the interest of the group performance. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, does not easily reduce interest in gaming and can increase players' desire to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve interest, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is created based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 279, a group effect execution process shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. An example is a gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in a second situation (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 289 and 326). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 274 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen. .

FIG. 275 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, variation patterns of sub variation numbers 1 to 26 are determined to correspond to the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26, respectively.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 276 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each preview performance. In the present embodiment, a preview performance suggesting that the display result of the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The preview performance is also a performance that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a jackpot, or a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The preview performance includes a group preview performance (also referred to as a group preview or group performance) and an SP first half title preview performance (also referred to as an SP first half title preview).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image in which a plurality of objects advance as a group. The plurality of objects include anything that moves, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, and machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or there may be multiple types. A pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of group preview presentations. Specifically, there is a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids advance as a group, a Bakchu group preview in which a rat character with the body of a bomb named Bakuchu advances in a group, A Boingo group preview in which characters named Boingo move together as a group may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the group preview performance is determined whether or not it is executed in the group preview lottery when the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 or 10 to 12 is determined to be the after fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach or final reach. and the type of group preview effect to be executed.

FIG. 276(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage A. In this embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided that have different production modes (background images, BGM, sound effects, appearing characters, etc.). . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a character named Yumu-chan, one of the six characters dressed as maids, performs.

As shown in FIG. 276(a), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a probability of 15%, and among these, a probability of 6-8 will be executed with a probability of 13%. It will be decided to be a group of people's notice, and there is a 2% probability that it will be decided to be a group of Boingo's notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, a group preview effect will be executed with an 85% probability, of which a 6 person group notice will be executed with a 55% probability, and a 30% It is decided that the Boingo group will be announced with a probability of .

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320, and the probability of being determined to the after variation pattern of after variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, when the probability of losing variation number 6 to 8 is about 1/102, The probability of being determined as a post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/320, and the probability of being determined to the after fluctuation pattern of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/1.1, it is assumed that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/1.1. The probability of determining the post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 85%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 64%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 64%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

FIG. 276(b) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage B. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character named Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 276(b), when the post-variation pattern corresponding to the loss is determined to be the post-variation pattern of 6 to 8, there is a 10% probability that the group preview performance will be executed, and among them, there will be an explosion with an 8% probability. It will be decided to be a Chu group notice, and with a 2% probability it will be decided to be a Boingo group notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, there is a 90% probability that a group preview performance will be executed, and among these, there will be a 60% probability that it will be determined to be a Bakuchu group notice, and 30 % probability that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 90%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 74%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

The SP first half title preview is an effect that suggests a jackpot based on the display mode of the character image indicating the first half of the SP reach title when the SP reach is developed. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both stage A and stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is performed in stage B. Executed only on Note that even in the case of stage A, a preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title may be executed.

In this embodiment, when the SP first half title preview is determined to be a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach, it is determined whether or not it is executed in the SP first half title preview lottery. , and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 276(c), when the after fluctuation pattern is determined to be the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 corresponding to a loss, the SP first half title preview is executed with a 20% probability, and the after fluctuation number corresponding to a win is determined. If the variation pattern after 10 to 12 is determined, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a probability of 80%.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is about 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed at the time of winning is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the SP first half title preview is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the SP first half title preview is not limited to 56%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot when it is executed.

In this way, the reliability (expectation level of jackpot) in the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (in the case of jackpot) in the SP first half title preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B). Expectation level) was 56%, and group previews have higher reliability than SP first half title previews. Therefore, when the group preview is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and the player is more likely to see the group preview being executed than the SP first half title preview. We have come to expect that.

In addition, the Boingo group notice in Stage A is only executed with a 2% probability when there is a loss, but it is executed with a 30% probability when there is a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed, , there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in Stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a loss, but is executed with a 55% probability when it is a win, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it will not be a loss. The possibility of this is greater than the Boingo group prediction. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is more likely to experience the Boingo group notice than when the 6-person group notice is executed. We have come to expect that.

Similarly, the Boingo group notice in Stage B is executed with a probability of only 2% in the case of a loss, but is executed with a probability of 30% in the case of a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed. is most likely a jackpot. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability when it is a loss, but with a 60% probability when it is a win, so the Bakuchu group notice is executed. There is a greater possibility that this will be a failure than the Boingo group preview. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Bakuchu group notice is executed, and the player feels that the Boingo group notice is executed more than the Bakuchu group notice. We have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the six-person group preview in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 55% when the game is a win. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a win. For this reason, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed more often at the time of a jackpot than the 6-person group preview in Stage A. As a result, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group preview is executed in Stage A, and the player is People have come to expect that crowd announcements will be carried out.

Note that the reliability of the group notice at stage A and the reliability of the group notice at stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group preview in Stage A and the group preview in Stage B need only be higher in reliability than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is higher than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview. It would be good if the reliability was high.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 277 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 277, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process advances to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, a group preview setting process), the process advances to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, symbol fluctuation control is performed according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is used to control the variation display of production symbols, such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer judgment values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the data, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, Then, control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 278 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 278, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation pattern command including the after variation patterns of after variation numbers 6 to 8 when a loss occurs, and a variation pattern including after variation patterns of after variation numbers 10 to 12 when a win occurs. Determine whether a command has been received. In addition, the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 18 to 12. ~26 fluctuation patterns.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received a variation pattern command that can execute a group preview (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the production control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command that can execute a group notice (Y in step S7061), it converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the previous variation time is 41500 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1246, and the subsequent variation time is 91900 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 3000. For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the previous variation time is 62000 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1861, and the subsequent variation time is 142800 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 4288. .

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in FIGS. Determine the type of.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the group preview lottery. If the performance control CPU 120 does not win in the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 wins the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065), and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the production control is performed so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame among the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in stage A, production control is performed to execute a group preview from the 1600th frame out of 1861 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame out of 4288 frames in the post-variation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 279 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. The group preview execution process is included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 279, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

If the performance control pattern for executing the group preview has not been set (N in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the performance control pattern for executing a group preview is set (Y in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the frame of the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the execution timing frame of the group preview has not been reached (N in step S7203), the production control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the execution timing frame of the group preview has been reached (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group preview (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. Performs control to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 30 of the special pattern LED board 20 and the right-handed hitting display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, 10 times in the case of a 10R variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 30, and the right-hand game display section 55 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Design of group preview performance]
Next, the design of the group preview effect at the development stage of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. As shown in FIG. 280, the work processes for group previews are, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (Step S904), sound creation process (Step S905), lottery integration process (Step S906), video integration process (Step S907), sound integration process (Step S908), lamp data The process includes a creation process (step S909) and a lamp assembly process (step S910).

In the outline creation step of step S901, an outline for newly designing a group preview in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created.

In the animation production process of step S902, the animation storyboard used in the group preview is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-board is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. production, and the actual production of animation.

In the main video production process of step S903, video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created for a long time. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview becomes longer due to a design change, the video data created in the video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 1385th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning. In addition, in the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the video so that the group preview is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 2000th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation process of step S905, data for various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group preview are created in accordance with the group preview video.

In the lottery incorporating step of step S906, data regarding various lotteries related to the group preview lottery, such as the group preview lottery, is created. In addition, in the process of incorporating this lottery, the expectation level (reliability) of the group notice etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software to be executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is installed into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software that is executed at the group notice.

In the sound incorporation step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed at the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, data on various lighting conditions such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice is created.

In the lamp installation step of step S910, data such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of various lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation step is used as software for lamp reproduction executed in the pachinko game 1. It is incorporated into the gaming machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery data, video, and sound data related to the group preview performance are created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Production of this video)
With reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the actual video production process for group previews will be specifically explained. 281 to 284 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 281, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, in the group preview, the main character Yumu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to represent Yumu-chan running. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video in which the character steps is created using the four character images g1 to g4 using a video creation tool. For example, when a video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher the layer is arranged (that is, the lower the number), the closer the image is to the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is supposed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to values desired by the user.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a predetermined layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, and constitute video data A1 to A4. According to the video data A1 to A4, the stepping video has a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of video data A1 to A4 of stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the video of the character stepping will be repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, stepping videos of other characters are created in the same way.

As shown in FIG. 282, in STEP 3, a moving image in which the character advances is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X-axis and the Y-axis is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400 and -320≦Y≦320.

By using the settings screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width by which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the character images are moved linearly on the X axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500. is set to .

As shown in FIG. 283, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters advance is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data in which a character named Jam-chan used in the group preview moves linearly on the X-axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500 is created using the same creation procedure.

As mentioned above, if you create video data for multiple characters that move linearly on the Deploy. Furthermore, by shifting the time axes between characters, it is possible to shift the timing of their appearance. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between the characters, it is possible to shift the positions on the Y-axis where the characters appear. Note that the Z-axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the Z axis is the axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen. The performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the two sides.

As shown in FIG. 284, in STEP 5, a group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), a group preview video is completed by placing video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the animation itself can change the speed at which the character moves while maintaining a video in which a pattern of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, like the video data of character C placed on layer 9, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is video data in which a video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. , the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 will move on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9. .

Note that in the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 284(a) as well, video data of a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same length on the timeline.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of the sand smoke is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side, the moving image of the sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters advance.

In the manner described above, it is possible to create video data of a group preview in which a plurality of characters advance. In addition, in the actual creation of the group preview video data, it is assumed that the game board 2 will cover the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 will cover the screen. Group preview video data is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to a screen of a larger size (eg, 20 inches) than a predetermined screen size (eg, 19 inches), group preview video data is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. As shown in FIG. 285, in the six-person group preview included in the group preview effect, an image of six characters, Maid A to Maid F, advancing as a group is displayed. The group preview performance is not limited to six characters, but a plurality of each character appears, so that among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, the group preview performance has the largest number of characters displayed. Maid A to Maid F are all wearing the same or substantially the same maid outfits, making it difficult to distinguish the types of characters other than recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the designs of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the differences at first glance. Note that maid A is Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, who is the character with the next highest priority after Yumu-chan, who is the protagonist.

In the six-person group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, six maid A (Mume-chan) appear, but only five of them have faces visible. That is, among the six maids who appear, one of the maids A's face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid B (Jam-chan) appear, but only four of them have faces visible. That is, among the five maids B who appear, one face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five Maid C's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids C who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Ds appear, of which only three Maid D's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids D who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid E's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids E who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Fs appear, of which only three Maid F's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids F who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, there are two types of characters displayed in a group preview performance: characters whose whole bodies fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies (for example, faces) do not fit within the display area of the screen. This includes a character whose other parts of the whole body (for example, parts other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview are characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko machine 1, such as maids C to F, and maids A (Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan). In the content of pachinko machine 1, maids C to F are more important characters than maids C to F, and maids A and B are more important than maids C to F because their faces do not fit within the display area of the screen. The proportion of parts other than the face that are displayed within the display area of the screen is low. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B appear more often while showing their faces than Maid C to F.

(auxiliary display)
FIG. 286 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview effect. As shown in FIG. 286, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the characters are progressing. In this embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as the auxiliary display. By displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, or more effectively, following the advancing character, it is possible to make the player think that the sand smoke is being generated by the progress of the character. This allows you to emphasize the way the character runs through the scene. As shown in FIG. 284(b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is the auxiliary display, is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 286, the image of the sand cloud is located on the back side of any of the characters appearing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, the layer in which Maid E's image is placed is on the front side of the layer in which Maid C's image is placed, so Maid E's image is lower than Maid C's image. is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to Maid E is located on the back side of both Maid E's image and Maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of the maid E is given priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is When the display of Maid C overlaps, the display of Maid C is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to Maid E.

(motion blur processing)
FIG. 287 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 287, in the group preview presentation, motion blur processing is applied to the advancing characters. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character), and by applying motion blur processing to the display of an advancing character, the afterimage of the character is displayed after the advancing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a lively group preview effect. In addition, when an image resulting from motion blur processing for one character overlaps an image resulting from motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for that character may be applied to avoid obstructing the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspects of outline when characters overlap)
FIG. 288 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 288, in the group preview presentation, one character may overtake the other characters. At this time, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of another character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is located in front of maid A, is shown passing maid A. In this case, the outline of maid B is larger than that of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid F, overtakes Maid F, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than the outline of Maid F, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that maid B, who is located in front of maid A, overtakes maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is smaller than the outline of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid D, overtakes Maid D, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than that of Maid D, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid D.

In addition, when one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to making the outline of the first character thicker, but also making the size of the first character larger or making the brightness of the first character higher than the brightness of the other character. One character may be displayed more emphatically than the other characters by making the contrast of one character higher or by making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of other characters.

(Display on screen of image display device)
FIG. 289 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during execution of the group preview effect. As shown in FIGS. 286 to 288 described above, since the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 is covered with the game board 2, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is no longer visible. However, as shown in FIG. 289, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 is visible.

Here, in FIG. 289, in the six-person group preview, as shown in (a), while the entirety of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A (in this example From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), while the whole of Maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, a part of Maid A is displayed in the first situation. The second maid B (Jam-chan) is displayed more than the situation, and while the entirety of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will occur. Furthermore, the character displayed first (maid A) and the character displayed second (maid B) have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is viewed while looking into the space between the image display device 5 and the device 5. In other words, FIG. 289 shows a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 7(b), the game board 2 is the image display device Even if the edge of the screen in 5 is covered, in the 6-person group preview, the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is still not shown in its entirety, but a part of the maid A (in this example) From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, but a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 A second situation occurs in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) who was displayed is not displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed.

(Overall picture of Bakuchu group preview)
FIG. 290 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in FIG. 290, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image in which characters such as Bakuchu advance in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. Sometimes there are.

In this way, in the Bakuchu group preview, the moving image data of the Bakuchu group preview is created by arranging on the screen an image of an animation in which one type of character moves as if it were moving. The video data for the Bakuchu group preview is also created in the same manner as the video data for the 6-person group preview, based on the work steps shown in FIGS. 280 to 284.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group preview performance)
FIG. 291 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. As shown in Figure 291, the group preview effects (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, and Boingo group preview) have a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into

The first display period is a period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends for the first time in the group preview performance. More specifically, the first display period is a period from when any character first appears in the group preview presentation until when any character first disappears. For example, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and the one character continues to advance at the top, the period until the one character disappears becomes the first display period. Alternatively, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. . In this embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, is overtaken by the second character that appears, and then the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the display of a new character continues to start and end. More specifically, during the second display period, after one of the characters first disappears in the group preview performance, new characters continue to appear one after another, and the last character disappears. This is the period until it appears. Note that the second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Furthermore, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of a character continues to end without the display of a new character starting. More specifically, the third display period is a period from when the last character appears in the group preview presentation until all the characters disappear. Note that the character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, but may be a character that is removed by the character that appears last. Note that the third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group preview performance, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and change the volume of the performance sound in the first display period. The volume is increased to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 290, for the effect sound corresponding to the group preview effect, the volume is at the minimum (for example, muted or lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases in volume. Once the specified value is reached, the specified value (for example, the set volume or maximum volume) is maintained thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. Thereafter, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases step by step until it reaches the minimum.

Note that the gradual increase in the volume in stages from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the gradual decrease in the volume from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound increases from the minimum to the specified value is such that the volume of the production sound decreases during the third display period. This is shorter than the fade-out time from the start until the volume of the performance sound reaches its minimum.

The brightness data table includes a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, and electric lamp. Includes game effect lamps such as a chew lamp 9H, a stick controller lamp 9J, and a trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. . That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and in the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the In the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of occurrence of 6-person group notice in Stage A)
FIG. 292 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group preview is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in Figure 292, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the six-person group preview starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 in which SP reach is lost in the first half, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the second half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the second half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing (2331st frame) close to half of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that will win at the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the 6-person group notice is It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display suggests that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. . However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In the predetermined period, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 293 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Bakuchu group preview is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Figure 293, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the Bakuchu group preview starts from the 66,600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that results in a loss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the second half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group preview is executed (2000th frame) is a timing close to half (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that hits in the second half of the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display indicates that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview of the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 294 to 318, the brightness data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emission) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group preview based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, a lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit. For example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, the location where a lit lamp is located is called a lighting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is off) is located is not called a lit location. In addition, in other examples, a lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, for example, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp is lit. A location where a lamp is lit at a lower brightness than the luminance of a lamp located at the lighting location may not be called a lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as elements) for turning on or off a lamp is defined by a brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referenced by a particular lamp is If data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored, the particular lamp is turned off. Further, if there is no storage area for data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a brightness data table that a specific lamp refers to, and the data storage area that the specific lamp refers to contains one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB). is stored, the specific lamp lights up.For example, when a specific performance such as a jackpot preview performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, the lamp that is referenced in the specific performance is Even if data for a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if data for a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table that is referenced in the production corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be lit. I will do it.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 294 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 294, the parent table in the group preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each group preview performance is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled for 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 295 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 295, in the child table of the group preview brightness data table, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 327 to 328 and FIGS. 383 to 385, which will be described later), of the period in which the group preview effect is executed, the frame lamp is W1, and the accessory lamp 9A is Grandchild tables Y1, L1 for the board left lamp 9B, U1 for the top lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided, respectively. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 291.

In the second display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387 to be described later) during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, the frame lamp is W2, the accessory lamp 9A is Y2, A grandchild table of L2 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U2 is provided for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 291.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, in the third display period (the effect period shown in FIGS. 331, 332, 388, and 389 described later), the frame lamp is W3, the accessory lamp 9A is Y3, A grandchild table of L3 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U3 is provided for the on board lamp 9C, and A3 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 291.

As shown in FIG. 295, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group preview effect, the frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R, Six types of brightness data tables are provided: object lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Note that the V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, near where the characters appear in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table Also not available. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that informs that the round is in a jackpot game state where a V winning can occur, that a V winning has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, so it is used in the group preview performance. This is because if the lights turn on, players will think that they have won a V prize or hit the jackpot.To avoid this kind of inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group preview presentation. Not yet. Note that the V lamp 9G may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance. It is sufficient that it is not used in .

In addition, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are positioned at positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, in the group preview performance, the characters advance). (nearly directly below the scene), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared either. The stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the pull operation of the stick controller 31A during an operation effect (the effect shown in FIG. 364 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the pull operation of the stick controller 31A during a PUSH effect (the effect shown in FIG. 325 (described later)). This lamp is lit to prompt the user to press the push button 31B in the performance shown in a19), so if it is lit during the group preview performance, the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview presentation. Note that the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance; However, it is sufficient that it is not used in the group preview performance.

The characteristics of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in the group preview presentation are summarized as follows. Specifically, the number of high-intensity lighting locations is greater in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs lighting control at equal intervals of 100 msec, whereas W2 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L. While the lighting control is performed at short intervals of 80 msec, the lighting control of the frame right lamp 9R is performed at long intervals of 80 msec.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is stipulated so that the lights are lit at high brightness while moving the lighting locations according to the direction of advance of the group notice, whereas for W2, the lights are lit at high brightness across multiple locations. For W3, the brightness data is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice. There is. Regarding the initial brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or lit at low brightness, whereas for W2 and W3, the brightness data is specified so that predetermined lighting locations are made to emit light at high brightness. Brightness data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the last luminance data, W3 is defined such that all the lamps, both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 are not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, whereas W2's luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used. Regarding brightness data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting purposes, W1 and W3 are defined, whereas W2 is not defined.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 296 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 296(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, Furthermore, at the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting. In addition, in W1, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, "G" and " “B” is defined as “0” indicating that the light is off. As a result, as shown in FIG. 326 (a22) and FIG. 383 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It becomes like this. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R", and "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "G" and "B". For example, when each lamp lights up mainly in green, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "G", and "R" and "B" are defined as "0" indicating off. It is sufficient if “0” indicating off is specified for “B”, and “1” indicating low brightness is specified for “B” when each lamp lights up mainly in blue, and “OFF” is specified for “R” and “G”. ``0'' indicating ``0'' may be specified.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the lamps are lit at high brightness from near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp at equal intervals of 100 msec. The brightness data is specified so that it moves by . Here, the areas around the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8 correspond to the locations where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is set so that the locations of the lamps lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. stipulated. The lamp on the left side of the frame is initially off or lit at low brightness, and gradually increases in intensity as the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified so that the light is turned on according to the brightness. On the other hand, the lamps 9R5 to 9R8 on the right side of the frame, which were initially lit at high brightness, will turn off or turn off at low brightness as the lamps that are lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified in . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 326 to 328 and FIGS. 383 to 385, which will be described later, the frame lamp also moves from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the characters appearing from the right end of the screen in the group preview. The position of the high-intensity light will change towards the left side.

In addition, W1 includes data for lighting one frame lamp at high brightness and extinguishing other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp, and the brightness is set so that the parts of the lamps that are lit in stages move. Data is specified. Thereby, in W1, the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness can be moved in accordance with the direction in which the character is moving.

Further, in W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely set to high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

Here, if data for these 10 minutes were not provided, if W1 was used to control the lamp lighting and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lamp lighting control would be performed again from T1-1. Even though the characters in the group preview have already appeared and the progress is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the high rise again starts from near the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8. The part of the lamp that lights up depending on the brightness moves, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in this embodiment, data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, so even if lighting control is performed using W1 and the transition to W2 is not made due to some abnormality, the data for 10 minutes is Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable. If the abnormality is resolved within these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing the game without feeling any discomfort.

In W1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

In addition, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes stipulated in W1 is brightness data in which adjacent frame lamps are turned on regularly in order so that the lighting points are shifted from the previous state of T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 296(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is displayed for each lamp at irregular intervals from T2-1 to T2-10 every 50 to 80 msec. stipulated. In addition, in W2, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

W2 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W2, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. will start to light up sparsely and at high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W1.

Note that in W2, unlike W1, luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will become sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is simply repeated, the player does not feel particularly uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data that is referenced every time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but the time required to create each data Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10, so that only one set of data that is repeatedly referenced can be created. This can improve time efficiency. The reason why lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period or the third display period. In addition, the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters advance as a group, so the lighting corresponding to such a performance is This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting mode.

As shown in FIG. 296(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is displayed for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 10 msec from T3-7 to T3-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued from T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T3-2 to T3-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or become dim. Increase the number of lamps that turn off or turn on at low brightness so that they turn on at high brightness. Regarding T3-7 to T3-38, brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 331, 332, 388, and 389, which will be described later, the frame lamp changes from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 to the left side in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. The position where the light turns off or lights up at low brightness changes over time.

Furthermore, in W3, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T3 to 30. Furthermore, in W3, similarly to W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

In W3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for accessory lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 297 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. RRRR”. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that monochromatic LEDs have fewer filters that block light than full-color LEDs, so the light is emitted more intensely. For this reason, monochrome LEDs have smaller brightness data corresponding to high brightness than full-color LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 297(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In Y1, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 326 (a22) and FIG. 383 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 297(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A is The brightness data is specified.

Y2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the characters are displayed in groups in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group preview performance. The lamp 9A starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in Y2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 297(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, similarly to Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not feel strange when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grandchild table for panel left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 298 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. As mentioned above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. "WWWWW" is displayed. It should be noted that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the left lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 326 (a22) and FIG. 383 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the board left lamp 9B is set to match the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In L1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 298(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, each lamp on the left lamp 9B is The brightness data is specified.

L2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left side of the board is The lamp 9B starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in L2, unlike in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 298(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, similarly to L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the board left lamp 9B is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 299 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (red)). The LED has three colors: R), green (G), and blue (B), and the brightness is expressed as hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the lamp on the panel 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 326 (a22) and 383 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next second display period. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In U1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, each lamp on the board lamp 9C is The brightness data is specified.

U2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the board is displayed in accordance with the appearance of the characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. The lamp 9C starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in U2, unlike U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 299(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similarly to U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

Note that in all of U1, U2, and U3, only data "0" is defined for the monochromatic on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. That is, the lamps 9C6 to 9C8 on the board are not used in the group preview presentation.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to The brightness is expressed as a hexadecimal number "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and its brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the V attacker lamp 9F, the value representing high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 326 (a22) and FIG. 383 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, the attacker lamp 9E, electric check lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are turned off. Or it will turn on at low brightness. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, each lamp is set to a high brightness sparsely in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when moving to the next second display period. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

In A1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 300(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. has been done.

A2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 329, 330, 386, and 387, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacker lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F begin to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in A2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in A1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 300(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, similarly to A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9H will be turned on so that there will be no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F when moving to the next production. The brightness data is defined so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Parent table in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 301, the parent table in the reach line brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each performance time of the reach line performance is defined.

The reach line performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. It is a performance that suggests (or informs) people. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 321 to 324 and FIGS. 371 to 374, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 with a flash of light. , the reach line expands inwardly and outwardly (in the left-right direction) to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, shrinks and expands, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec to match the reach line performance.

(child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 302, in the child table of the reach line brightness data table, the time of reach line performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which a flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 321 (a8), (a9) and 371 (a8), (a9), which will be described later), the frame Grandchild tables W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the board left lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of effect shown in FIGS. 322 and 372 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the board left lamp. L12 grandchild tables are provided for each node 9B. Note that during the period in which the reach line occurs, the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild table is prepared.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, the reach line extends inward and outward and expands while contracting (as shown in FIGS. 323 (a13) to 324 (b17) and FIGS. 373 (a13) to 374 (b17), which will be described later). During the production period), the following grandchild tables are provided: W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the top board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E.

During the period in which the reach line performance is executed, during the period in which the reach line disappears (the period of the performance shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the board left lamp 9B, U14 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in Figure 302, regarding the brightness data table referenced in the reach line effect, the left side of the frame is Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a top board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period in which the reach line occurs, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

In this way, in the reach line performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as the group preview performance or fewer lamps than the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 303(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the game is now reachable, and is not a performance that arouses the player's expectations by suggesting a jackpot like the group preview performance. For this reason, the reach line performance does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group preview performance. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, so that each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the execution time of the reach line effect is shorter than that of the group preview effect, it is difficult to set up different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually, as in the group preview effect. Rather than performing lighting control based on the lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 321 (a8) and FIG. 371 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. .

As shown in FIG. 303(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 322 and 372, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 303(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 323 and 373, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 303(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18), which will be described later, the frame lamp also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 304 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 304(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec from T11-1 to T11-2. In particular, as shown in FIG. 321 (a8) and FIG. 371 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 304(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec from T12-1 to T12-2. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 322 and 372, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 304(c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 323 and 373, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 304(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 305 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 305(a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 321 (a8) and 371 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 305(b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 322 and 372, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 305(c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 323 and 373, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while the reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 305(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18), which will be described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out at the same time as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 306 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 306(a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 321 (a8) and FIG. 371 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are Brightness data is specified so that the light is lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 306(b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 323 and 373, which will be described later, while the reach line is occurring, lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are lit with high brightness. The brightness data is defined as follows.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 307 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 307(a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 321 (a8) and FIG. 371 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, the brightness is set such that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 307(b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 323 and 373, which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 307(d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18) and FIG. 374 (b18), which will be described later, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 308 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 308, the parent table in the background preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each background preview performance is defined.

The background preview performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec to match the background preview performance.

(Child table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 309 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 309, in the child table of the background preview brightness data table, the time of the background preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W21 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y21 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L21 is used for the left lamp 9B, U21 is used for the top lamp 9C, and U21 is used for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background preview effect is executed, W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the accessory lamp 9A, L22 for the board left lamp 9B, U22 for the top lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

During the last 600,000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the accessory lamp 9A, L23 for the board left lamp 9B, U23 for the top lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

As shown in FIG. 309, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the background preview effect, in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600000 msec, the left frame lamp 9L, the right frame lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A Six types of brightness data tables are provided: , panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 310 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 310(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 310(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 311(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 50 msec from T21-1 to T21-4.

As shown in FIG. 311(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 311(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 312 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 312(b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 312(c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the board left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 313 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 313(a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 313(b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 313(c), in the grandchild table U23, luminance data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 314 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at 50 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 314(c), in the grandstand table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F is activated from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec. Luminance data is defined for .

(Brightness data table when all lights on)
FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 315(a) to (h), in the brightness data table when all lights are on, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, High brightness brightness data (in this example, "F" which is the maximum value) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH performance)
FIG. 316 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during PUSH performance. The PUSH performance is a performance that prompts the user to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 325 (a19), which will be described later.

FIG. 316(a) shows a brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

FIG. 316(b) shows a brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. At T41, brightness data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 317 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview brightness data table according to the modification. As shown in FIG. 317, in the child table in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table that is referred to in each time period. (also referred to as a brightness data table) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, during the period (2000 msec) up to the middle of the first display period, W101 is for the frame lamp, Y101 is for the accessory lamp 9A, L101 is for the left lamp 9B, L101 is the top lamp. Grandchild tables U101 and A101 are provided for the attacker lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, for the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec), the frame lamp is W102, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y102. , L102 for the board left lamp 9B, U102 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modification.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period during which the group preview effect is executed, W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 for the board left lamp 9B, and U103 for the top lamp 9C. , and the grandchild table of A103 are provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modification.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts. The control of the game effect lamp 9 is completed in the second brightness data table, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is continued during the second display period. However, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 318 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview brightness data table according to the modification. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 318(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp at equal intervals of 20 msec from T101-1 to T101-10, and furthermore, at the last time T101-11. 10 minutes (600,000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

As shown in FIG. 318(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. W102 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W102, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness across multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. Furthermore, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 318(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 2 msec from T103-7 to T103-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued at long intervals of 14 msec from T103-7 to T103-38. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are turned off gradually or turned off at low brightness in stages. Or increase the number of lamps that turn on at low brightness. Regarding T103-7 to T103-38, brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. Thereby, in accordance with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left end of the screen in the group notice, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, in W103, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similarly to W101, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 319 to 404, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game will be described. In this embodiment, a performance mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. Further, in the figure, hatching indicates how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks.

(Production mode at stage A)
With reference to FIGS. 319 to 341, the performance mode in stage A will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 319(a1), when variable display starts based on one pending memory, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing in Stage A is displayed. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 319(a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 319(a3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 320 (a4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 320 (a5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 321 (a7), a decorative pattern for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 321 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIGS. 301 to 307. In the state shown in FIG. 321(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 321(a9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 322 (a10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 322 (a11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 322 (a12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 322, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 323 (a13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 323 (a14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 323 (a15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 323, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 324 (a16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 324 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (a18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 324 (a18), if a six-person group preview is executed, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 325 (a19), and if a background preview is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 334 The process moves to the effect shown in (a101), and if the lamp notice is to be executed, the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 335 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and six characters dressed as maids appear in a group. The performance progresses as follows. A background preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of a variable display of a special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) This is an effect that is displayed together with a background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a performance that indicates that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A, etc.). It is a performance that lights up or flashes. In the lamp notice, any one lamp or plural lamps among the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinking, or lamps provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked. You may blink.

In stage A, a group preview (for example, a six-person group preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when the six-person group preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 325 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 316. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 325 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs where the text image of “!” disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, a six-person group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 325 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 326 (a22), the six-person group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 326 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Mume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 326 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 289 (a), in which the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is not displayed in its entirety, but the maid A's This shows a first situation in which a part (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During execution of the six-person group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 294 to 300. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 326 to 328, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move. In addition, the scene where the group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) was performed, images other than those related to the group preview performance (for example, background images, images related to the first half of SP Reach preview, etc.) ), the brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images, which has decreased during the group preview presentation, gradually returns to the original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the fourth symbol 5J and small symbol 5M indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number, the first pending memory display area 5D, the second pending memory display area 5U, the active display area 5A, etc. The display of information related to games with high importance in terms of wins and losses and advantages of games is given a high priority so that the brightness will not be lowered even if a group preview effect is executed.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 291, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 326 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 326 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 289 (b), in which the entirety of the initially displayed maid A is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is Although the whole of Maid B (Jam-chan), who was displayed more than in the first situation and was displayed second, was not displayed yet, a part of Maid B (part of her face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 327 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 327 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 327 (a27), an animation is displayed where characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 328 (a28), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the second character that appears running at the top (first) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 328 (a29), the second character running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 328 (a30), the character running at the top and appearing second is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 329 (a31), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in a group in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 329(a32) to 330(a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 331 (a37), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 331 and 332, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. In addition, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37), when entering the third display period, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 331 (a38), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 331 (a38), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the right frame lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 331 (a39), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIGS. 332 (a40) and (a41), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 332 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 333, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with a six-person group preview according to the present embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 333 (a201), similarly to the present embodiment shown in FIG. This is the first situation in which a part of the face (in this example, part of the face) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 326 (a24), while the entirety of the initially displayed maid A is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A is displayed compared to the first situation, and In contrast to the second situation in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) displayed is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 333 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, the maid A continues to run, and the entire maid A is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 333 (a203), the second maid B appears only after the first maid A has run to the left of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not appear to be a group preview presentation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 326 to 332, an animation in which multiple characters appear and run one after another without any gaps is displayed, so multiple characters advance as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful performance. Further, since the number of characters that overtake other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters that overtake other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a lively group preview performance can be shown to the player.

When the background preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 334 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 316.

As shown in FIG. 334 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (a103), as a background preview, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on an image display device with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background). 5 is displayed on the screen. Furthermore, during the performance of the background preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance of the background preview based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 300. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background preview.

When the lamp preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 335 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 316.

As shown in FIG. 335 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, accessory lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks. Incidentally, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 332 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 334 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 335 (a113) ends, As shown in FIG. 340, a symbol feeding effect is executed. The symbol feeding effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed (in this embodiment, the ornamental symbol in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C) stops in the ornamental symbol that is in the reach mode, and the ornament that stops. This is a performance that prompts the player to decide whether or not the symbol is a decorative symbol constituting a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 336 (a43), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 336(a44) to 337(a48), the central decorative pattern continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 338(a49) to 339(a54), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 340(a55) to 340(a57). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 340 (a57), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect has been completed, as shown in FIGS. 341 (a58) and (a59), an effect called whiteout is applied to the image including the character image and the "3" decorative symbol in the ready-to-reach mode. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Figure 341 (a59), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

(Production mode in the first half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 342 to 350, the production mode in the first half of SP reach will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 342 (a61) and (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 342 (a63), the title of SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as an SP reach performance, a maid character such as Yumu-chan catches Bakushu, so the title "Catch Bakushu!" is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 343 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) standing in a dignified position is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 343(c2), an image in which Bakuchu, the opponent's character (enemy character), is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 343(c3) to 344(c5), an animation is displayed in which Maid A chases the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 344 (c6), after an animation in which Maid A pounces on Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 9), the effect shifts to the effect shown in Figure 345 (c11). However, when there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20), the game will shift to the effect shown in Figure 347 (c21), and if it will shift to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), or When moving to the final reach (in the case of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 350 (c31).

If the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 344 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 345 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 345 (c11), an image of Maid A depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 345 (c12), due to a production effect called blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that were in a losing state is changed. The image gradually becomes black, and as shown in Figure 345 (c13), the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which were lost, become completely invisible. .

After that, as shown in Figures 346 (c14) and (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that had been switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 344 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 347 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 347 (c21), an image of Maid A catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 347 (c22), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 347 (c23). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 348 (c24) and (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 349 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 344 (c6), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 350 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 350 (c31), an image of Maid A depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350 (c32), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that are lost is gradually blackened. Up to this point, the effect is the same as in the case where the player loses in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 345 (c11) and (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 350 (c33), when moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, an effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the player lost in the first half of SP reach.

Then, after the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, when moving to the latter half of SP reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 351 (c41), and the final When shifting to reach (in the case of variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 358 (c71). In this way, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot, there are fluctuation patterns that pretend that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. As a result, from the player's perspective, once he thinks that he will lose in the first half of the SP reach, he will be able to move to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Production mode in the second half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 351 to 357, the production mode in the second half of SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 350 (c33), the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 351 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 351 (c41), character images, background images, etc. become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figure 351 (c42), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that had been switched on the back side appears. It becomes visible. During the performance of the second half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach.

As shown in Figure 351 (c42), when the second half of SP Reach is performed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war against Bakuchu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (c43) to FIG. 352 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 351 (c46), after an animation in which Maid A and Maid B jump at Bakuchu is displayed, the case of losing (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 12) is shown in Figure 353 (c51). When the game moves to the production and there is a jackpot (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 23), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 355 (c61), and when it moves to the final reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 15 and 26) moves to the effect shown in FIG. 358 (c71).

If the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 352 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 355 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 355 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (c52), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 353 (c53), the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which are lost, disappear completely.

After that, as shown in Figures 354 (c54) and (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that had been switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 352 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 355 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 355 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 355 (c62), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 355 (c63). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 356 (c64) and (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 357 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at final reach)
With reference to FIGS. 358 to 368, the production mode in the final reach will be explained.

When moving to the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 352 (c46), the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 358 (c71). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black, as shown in Figure 358 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect appears in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 358 (c72). be done. After that, as shown in Figure 358 (c73), an effect is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and the message ``Let's go!'' is displayed. ” is displayed. Note that the light effect display as shown in Figure 358 (c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in Figure 358 (c71) and the effect in which the main character's face image is displayed as shown in Figure 358 (c73). It is deliberately inserted in between. Thereby, by the effect shown in FIG. 358 (c72), it is possible to more easily convey to the player that the final reach has been reached.

After that, the performance during the final reach will be executed. During the second half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 359 (c74), an image of maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 359 (c75) to 359 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Figure 359 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed. This indicates the theme of the performance that will be executed at the final reach. In this example, "all members gather" is indicated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 361 (c80) to 362 (c85), animations are displayed at multiple timings to introduce the characters that will appear in the final reach performance. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, Maid A, etc., and near the end (or in the second half), characters with high priority such as the main character appear. A character appears. Note that characters with a high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a character with a high priority such as the main character appear at the beginning (or the first half) or near the end (or the second half) so that it stands out more than a character with a low priority such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in Figure 363 (c86), when the final reach effect is executed, an image of the six characters that appeared in the six-person group preview standing up and declaring war against Bakuchu is displayed. be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 363 (c87) to 364 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 364 (c90), after an animation in which six characters chase a blowout is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 364 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit in which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the words "Close!!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in Figure 364 (c91), in the event of a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main fluctuation number 15), the performance shifts to the performance shown in Figure 365 (c101), and in the event of a jackpot (In the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 366 (c111).

If a loss is confirmed in the final reach, after the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 364 (c91), the performance shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 365 (c101). In the production shown in FIG. 365 (c101), an image of six characters depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (c102), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that have become lose modes becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 365 (c103), the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which are lost, become completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if you gradually increase the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the final reach, after the performance shown in Figure 364 (c91), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 366 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 366 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 366 (c112), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 366 (c113). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 367 (c114) and (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 368 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production style at stage B)
With reference to FIGS. 369 to 389, the production mode in stage B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 369 (b1), when variable display starts based on one pending memory, decorative symbols are variably displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 369 (b2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 369 (b3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 369 (b4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 370 (b5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 371 (b7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 371 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIGS. 301 to 307. Note that the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 301 to 307 are the same as the brightness data tables used in the stage A reach line performance. In the state shown in FIG. 371(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 371 (b9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 372 (b10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode. Note that the reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 372 (b11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 372 (b12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 372, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 373 (b13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 373 (b14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 373 (b15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 373, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 374 (b16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually shrinks step by step, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 374 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 374 (b18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 374 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 375 to 379. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 375 (b19), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 375 (b20) to 376 (b24), the decorative pattern in the center continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 377(b25) to 378(b30), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 379(b31) to 378(b33). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 379 (b33), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 380 (b34) and (b35), due to whiteout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is gradually whitened. Eventually, the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode disappears completely. After that, as shown in Figure 380 (b36), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

As shown in FIGS. 381 (b37) and (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 381 (b39), the title of SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

In stage B, a group preview (for example, a Bakuchu preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed during a period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-change is being displayed. For example, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed during the period when the title of the first half of SP reach is being displayed, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 382 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 316. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 382 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 382 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 383 (b43), the Bakuchu group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 383 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 383 (b44), while the entirety of the first (first) character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character (in this example, part of the face) is not displayed. ) is displayed, representing the first situation.

During execution of the Bakuchu group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIGS. 294 to 300. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 383 to 385, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 291, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 383 (b45), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 383 (b45) is such that while the entire first character is not displayed yet, a part of the first character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second This represents a second situation in which a part of the second character (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed while the entire character displayed in the second position is not yet displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 384 (b46) to (b48), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 385 (b49), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the first character displayed running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 385 (b50), the first character displayed running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 385 (b51), the first character displayed running at the top disappears from the left end of the screen first. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 386 (b52), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 386 and 387, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in a group in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 386 (b52) to 387 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' .

As shown in FIG. 388 (b58), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 388 and 389, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 388 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 388 (b59), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 388 (b59), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the right frame lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 388 (b60), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIG. 388, as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if you have won the SP first half title preview lottery, the SP first half title preview will be performed by changing the display format (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch the Bakuchu!" . For example, as shown in Figure 381 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch the Bakchu!" in the title display in the first half of SP reach is white, but as shown in Figure 387 (b56) As shown in , when the character image in the group preview is subsequently displayed on the layer in front of the layer where the title is being displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview, the text "Catch Bakuchu!" in the title display switches to red, and as shown in Figure 388 (b59) and (b60), the character image in the group preview disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 389 (b61) and (b62), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 389 (b63), the group preview effect ends when the last character disappears. Thereafter, the process shifts to the first half of SP reach shown in FIG. 343(c1).

(Boingo group preview)
With reference to FIGS. 390 to 399, the presentation mode of the Boingo group preview will be described.

In the six-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview described above, a plurality of characters advance as a group from the right edge of the screen toward the left edge. In this way, the six-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview were effects in which characters advance in the X-axis direction on the XY plane shown in FIG. 282. On the other hand, in the Boingo group preview, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group preview is a 3D performance in which characters advance in a three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 390 to 395 are diagrams for explaining the performance mode when the Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. Note that even when the Boingo group is executed in stage B, the presentation mode is the same as that shown in FIGS. 390 to 395. Although not shown, the Boingo group preview performance also includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, similar to the six-person group preview performance and the Bakuchu group preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 390(d1), the Boingo group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

During execution of the Boingo group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 294 to 300, for example. For example, in the group preview, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the locations where the characters appear begin to light up with high brightness, and then the locations of the lamps that light up with high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. In addition, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running.

As shown in FIG. 390(d2), a preceding image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where the character group appears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 390(d3), the first character appears from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in Figures 391 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually moves towards the screen. be done. As shown in FIG. 391 (d6), as the first character displayed (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 392 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and advance from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, so that the characters cover the entire screen. As shown in FIGS. 393 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 394 (d13) and (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, it comes to cover most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 394 (d15), the last character is displayed in an enlarged manner from one end of the screen to the other end, and the last character covers the entire screen.

After that, as shown in Figures 395 (d16) and (d17), as the last character disappears from the screen, the original background image is displayed, and as shown in Figure 395 (d18), when the last character disappears, the original background image is displayed. The group preview performance ends.

FIG. 396 is a diagram for explaining details of the Boingo group notice. 396(A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 390(d3) to 391(d6), and FIGS. 392(d8) and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 396(A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 396(B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 396(E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so the subsequent character image must not be placed. Good too.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to this embodiment will be compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 397, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the preceding image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 390 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the strange feeling of a character suddenly appearing large, it is necessary to create an animation in which the character is displayed small and then gradually enlarged, as shown in Figures 397 and 398. .

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in Fig. 397 (d101) to Fig. 398 (d105) is performed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in Fig. 390 (d3) as shown in Fig. 398 (d106). This requires additional production time, and images for animation must also be created. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 390(d2) and (d3), a preliminary image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image due to the effect, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Figure 390 (d3) and Figure 398 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Variation example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 399 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. The example shown in FIG. 399 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 395. For example, as shown in FIGS. 399 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 390 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 399 (d103). , the normal background image may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed while the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 389 to foretell a jackpot. Furthermore, instead of enlarging the last character to cover the entire screen, the next effect may be switched to using an animation in which the background image used for the group preview effect is rolled up like a scroll.

(dog group notice)
With reference to FIGS. 400 to 402, the presentation mode of the dog group notice will be described.

In this embodiment, a six-person group preview, a Bakuchu preview, and a Boingo group preview are illustrated as group preview effects, but the pachinko game machine 1 is also known as a dog group preview as shown in FIGS. 400 to 402. It may also be possible to execute a group preview effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 400(e1), the first character is displayed, then multiple dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. 400(e2), and then as shown in FIG. 400(e3). The screen area may be covered by a group of characters as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 401 (e4) to (e6), as the last displayed character disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 400 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 401 (e6) , the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the performance of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 389 to announce a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. (b) X2 is shorter than the distance (the length between them on the X axis) X1 between the first character displayed and the last character displayed in the six-person group preview. Further, since the execution times are the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group preview is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six person group preview. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group preview is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six person group preview. In addition, the dog group preview performance has a higher expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group preview performance, and the dog group preview performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group preview performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to FIG. 403 and FIG. 404, description will be given of an effect mode when a group preview effect is executed during the reach line.

As shown in FIG. 403 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group preview effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 403 (f2) to (f4), and then, in the state shown in FIGS. ), a symbol feeding effect may be executed.

[Main composition and effects]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Crowd preview performance) and
Blessing effect execution means for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) ) and,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIGS. 347 to 349 is performed after the six-person group preview performance shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 is performed),
If it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result that is different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern of variation number 9), and the variable display is In the first predetermined period (for example, the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. 292) until the display suggests that the display is a losing display result, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293),
In cases where it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the variable display has not changed since the start of the variable display. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3+T4 period, T5+T6 period, T7+T8 period) until the specific display result is suggested, the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, the feeling of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but if the result of the variable display is a fluctuating pattern that results in a losing display, in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group preview performance, the feeling of elation can be sustained or revived. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, a fanfare performance that is a blessing performance is performed, so the group preview performance is performed in the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation. , Even if the feeling of elation fades over time, it can be sustained or rekindled through a blessing performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. That is, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the gaming state to be advantageous. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the lighting corresponding to the jackpot occurs. A combination of aspects results in a specific display result. In addition, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot is specified. The result will be displayed. Furthermore, the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 may be a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7"). A jackpot occurs when the machine stops with a symbol combination), and the display of the specific special symbol becomes the specific display result.

The "losing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the losing display result. That is, the losing display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous even if it is derived. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss; A combination of corresponding lighting modes becomes a losing display result. In addition, when the combination of lighting modes on the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will result in a loss display. Furthermore, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 become a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3") and stop. Sometimes, the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the gaming value imparting rate (for example, the payout rate of game balls) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, a jackpot game state that is controlled when each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 9 occur is exemplified as an advantageous state. The advantageous state may be a small winning game state that is controlled when a small winning occurs, or may be a variable probability state or a time saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview presentation, or may be a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group preview presentation. good.

"Blessing performance" is a performance that displays an image that congratulates the variable display result having become a specific display result, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display display result becoming a specific display result. It is also a performance that displays images that celebrate things. "Congratulate" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, "bless" improves the player's expectations for an advantageous state by suggesting or informing that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. This includes causing someone to do something. For example, the blessing effect is that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the special figure 2 variable display section of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot. 22 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are a specific special symbol ( This includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that a jackpot symbol has been reached or that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

"The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance" means that the group preview performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory, and then the blessing performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory. Including that the performance is executed. In addition, "the blessing performance can be executed after the group performance" means that the display result of the variable display based on the first pending memory is a specific display result. When a group preview effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or foretells the display result before the display result starts, the group preview effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the suspended memory of the 1 is started and the 1 is displayed. This includes executing a blessing effect within the variable display based on the reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result. This is exemplified by the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss. , that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 corresponds to a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the combination of lighting modes corresponds to a loss; and the decorative pattern display area of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative symbols variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R become a specific predetermined symbol (losing symbol combination) and then stop. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" indicates to the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result due to the movable body 32 not operating at a specific timing, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result. This is exemplified by the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, and the period T7+T8 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot. , the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the display is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative pattern that is being played becomes a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the movement of the movable body 32 at a specific timing suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. It's okay.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 291).

From this, by making the second display period in which characters appear one after another in the group preview presentation the longest period, it is possible to make the group preview presentation more powerful. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from when a character first appears to when the character first leaves to the shortest period, it is possible to prevent group preview effects from being suddenly executed. Can be done.

(1-3) The first character displayed in the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yumu-chan, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in a group preview performance is a high-priority character such as the main character, and is a character familiar to the player, but after that, characters that appear less frequently than the main character in other performances, etc. By appearing in the group preview performance, the player can be surprised about the group preview performance and can be made to feel that it is a rare performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

"Characters with high priority" include characters that have the highest priority among the main character and characters other than the main character that appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the performance.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern with variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the display of the character in the group effect is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 292 and 293).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview effect will be executed near the second half even in the first half. This allows the lingering impression of the group preview performance to be extended to a later stage.

(1-5) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) indicates that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After making it appear that the variable display result is the specific display result, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation numbers 23 and 26),
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is One display period starts (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display is made to appear to be a loss display result, and the display result of the variable display is a win display result, the fanfare performance, which is a blessing performance, is executed. , a group preview performance is performed during the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation, and even if the elation fades over time, a blessing performance is used to maintain or revive the elation. You can

(1-6) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result In the case of a pattern that suggests that it is (for example, the variation pattern of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result, A common display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 319 to 368).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern with variation number 9 and the variation pattern with variation number 20 will perform a common effect until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern with variation number 12 and the variation pattern with variation number 23 will display the same effect. A common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and a common effect is executed between the variation pattern with variation number 15 and the variation pattern with variation number 26 until the display result is confirmed. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

Note that the display result of the variable display is a pattern that suggests that the display result is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15), and the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result. (For example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different displays until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result. may be performed.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while mutually different performances are being executed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance and a preview performance that is different from the group preview and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, SP first half title preview performance) The execution period of
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the preview effect (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 383 to 389).

Thereby, even if the group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed, the SP first half title preview performance can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the preview effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 383 to 389).

Thereby, when a preview performance such as an SP first half title preview performance is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the group preview performance. Note that the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and the group preview performance do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the preview effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 276, , group previews are more reliable than SP first half title previews).

As a result, other preview effects that have lower expectations for jackpots than the group preview effects will not be displayed in the front layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview effects, so players will be able to receive a jackpot in a favorable manner. suggestions can be made. In this manner, in the present embodiment, a performance with a low expectation level of a jackpot is not placed in front of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview effect decreases, while the display of information regarding the game (for example, the number of first pending memories and the second pending memory) decreases in brightness. The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J showing the number, the small symbol 5M, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when a group preview effect is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview effects (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview effect, which has lower expectations than the group preview effect) are lowered, while We give high priority to the display of information related to games that are of high importance to players in terms of winnings, losses, and advantages, and do not lower the brightness even when the group preview effect is executed. Can show information.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, a group effect execution process shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 289 and 326).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

The “first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed” means that the entire initially displayed character is still displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 289(a). A situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 while not being displayed, or a situation where the gaming machine frame 3 is displayed as an image, as shown in FIG. 326(a). In the display area that is visible to the player while covering the screen of the device 5, the entirety of the initially displayed character is not yet displayed, but the character is displayed at the edge of the display area that is visible to the player. Including situations where part of the is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first character appearing is not completely visible, but a part of the first character appearing is visible.

“A second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed” is shown in FIG. 289(b). As shown in FIG. 326(b), and the second displayed character is not displayed in its entirety yet, but a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 326(b) As shown in , in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character that was initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the end of the display area that is visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and while the entire second displayed character is not yet displayed, the character is visible to the player. This includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears following the first character before the first character appears completely.

(2-2) In the group effect, the character displayed first and the character displayed second have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, so it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 287).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be multiple characters, so it is possible to further prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character to be displayed in the group performance is being displayed, but the sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output before the display of the second character to be displayed starts. (eg, the example shown in FIG. 326).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output and the first character appears, thereby informing the player that the group preview performance has been executed. Since the start sound ends before the character appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group preview effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but ends by the time the second character appears. .

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include characters whose whole bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies do not fit within the display area of the screen and characters whose whole bodies are displayed outside of the display area of the screen. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 285) includes a character that is displayed within the display area of the screen.

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character is displayed so that the whole body fits within the display area of the screen, and the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen. The first character, which does not fit within the display area of the screen but is displayed with other parts of the whole body within the display area of the screen, is displayed in a mixed manner (for example, the example shown in FIG. 285).

Thereby, it is possible to create the illusion that more types of characters appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by a shielding object (for example, the gaming machine frame 3), and the character that is first displayed in the group presentation is displayed at the position covered by the shielding object. starts, and then the display of the second displayed character starts,
Even when the screen is viewed while covered by the shielding object, the first situation changes to the second situation in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 289).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, there is no situation where only one person is displayed in a group preview effect, so there is no question as to whether or not it is a group preview effect, and only one person appears. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that this is not the case.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is viewed from the side between the screen and the shielding object, it is possible to view the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 289).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation where only one player is displayed in the group preview presentation, so the group preview presentation It is possible to avoid questions such as whether or not this is true or not, or the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display related to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shielding object on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, a display related to the group effect is created on a screen of a predetermined size (for example, In order to be applicable to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches), a display related to the group effect is created up to an area corresponding to the large size.

Thereby, even if the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the predetermined size, the data of the created group preview effect can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (for example, maids C to F) that are less important in the content of the gaming machine, and characters that are more important than the low importance characters. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the content of the gaming machine,
The high-importance character is displayed at a lower rate than the low-importance character, whose face does not fit within the display area of the screen and the parts of the whole body other than the face fit within the display area of the screen (for example, 285).

Thereby, characters with high importance such as the main character can have their faces more easily recognized in the group preview presentation than characters with low importance such as supporting characters, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37) that executes a performance,
The effects executed by the effect execution means include a group effect (for example, a group preview effect shown in FIGS. 326 to 332) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group;
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
The group performance is a performance that displays the largest number of characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, in the group preview performance, the largest number of characters appear among all the performances, so it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display is being performed in which he can expect to win a jackpot.

"The group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances that are executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory of 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is displayed variablely, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when a jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect that has the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory in 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is variablely displayed, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when the jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the production with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens in the group preview production is included. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

(3-2) A performance in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group performance, and a specific performance in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, the second half of the SP reach or the final reach) is executed.

This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances, among which the largest number of characters can appear in the group preview performance.

Note that the specific performance may be a performance in which the number of types of characters to be displayed is greater than that of the group preview performance.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

Thereby, a powerful performance can be shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest period among the group preview performances.

Note that the number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the group performance,
An auxiliary display will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character takes priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 286).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by providing an auxiliary display for characters, it is possible to show a more dynamic group preview effect to the player, but since the auxiliary display does not obstruct the visibility of other characters, it is possible to display more characters. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display that shows that the character is progressing. For example, as shown in FIG. 286, an image display that emphasizes that the character is progressing ( For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of the character's path (for example, an image display of the character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display of the character's footprints). , an image display representing the character's aura). The "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is performed near the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The character display in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect are displayed on different layers on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 284, the image of sand smoke is layer 1, the character images are placed in layers after layer 2).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the character images and the auxiliary display can be suitably shown to the player.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group effect includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C in layer 9) and second character data (e.g., character C in layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. video data),
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values regarding the moving speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.

As a result, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect.

(4-4) In the group effect, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 284).

Thereby, since a plurality of characters do not move in the same way at the same position, it is possible to suitably show the group preview effect to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, in FIG. 328).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character that appears in the group preview presentation as shown in FIGS. 326 to 328, or the character that appears third or later in the group preview presentation. It's okay. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters advance as a group, the second character that appears in the group preview performance is the first character displayed as the "newly displayed character." It is preferable for the second character to appear immediately after the character to overtake the first character to create a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, since the second character to appear disappears at the top, overtaking the first character to appear, it is possible to present a lively group preview performance to the player.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a character that overtakes other characters,
The number of overtaking characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated, and it is possible to present the group preview presentation with a sense of dynamism to the players. can be shown.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is smaller than the outline of the other character. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 288).

This allows the player to easily see how the character overtakes other characters.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Crowd preview performance) and
Executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect. means (for example, processing for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
The display of the suggestion image ends before the first display period in the group effect starts (for example, the example shown in FIG. 325).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of a group preview effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 325. , it may be an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group preview effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect (for example, a character image of "Group"). In addition, in the timer performance, the time until the group preview performance is executed is measured using a clock image, and when the time measured reaches a predetermined time, a character image (the character "Group") indicating the execution of the group preview performance is displayed. (images) may also be displayed.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the character appears first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) ends, the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, example shown in FIG. 325).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!"),
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operation means is operated during the display of the suggestion image ends before the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, in FIG. 325 example shown in ).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-4) When the operation means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of performances including the group performance (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 325, 334, and 335).

As a result, a plurality of performances are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Equipped with a group of people preview performance, a group of dogs preview performance shown in Figures 400 to 402),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
The group performance includes a first group performance (for example, a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (for example, a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1),
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2),
the first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured such that the straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 402). .

The "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in Figure 402. This is the straight-line distance (distance along the X-axis) from the end of the character to the end of the character that is last displayed. This straight-line distance is determined by the time T, where T is the time from when the first character is displayed to when the last character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the speed of each character is V. It can be calculated by multiplying the speed V (T×V).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, two types of group preview performances can be suitably shown to the players.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1/V1) is the same or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2/V2) (for example, as shown in FIG. 402). example shown).

Thereby, two types of group preview effects can be executed using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the first group effect is executed,
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for dog group preview performances that have a lower execution probability and higher expectations than six-person group previews, by making the speed of the characters slower than for six-person group previews, for example, a player can take a picture of a character in a dog group preview performance. You can increase your chances of doing so.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2) is the degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the first group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2). degree D1).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and movement distance of the characters, so that it is possible to provide the player with a suitable group preview performance.

(7-5) In the second group production, a plurality of characters located at the end of the screen are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 401).

Thereby, it is possible to use the group preview performance as an opportunity to switch to an image for the next performance and show it to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
Group effect execution means (for example, group effect execution processing shown in FIG. 37, Boingo shown in FIGS. 390 to 399 Equipped with a group preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen,
At a timing related to the initial start of display of the character at the specific position, a preliminary display (for example, display of a preliminary image using a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the particular position difficult to see is performed (for example, , example shown in FIG. 390).

The "previous display" may be any display that makes it difficult to see the character, and may be any display that hides the specific position where the character appears (for example, display of effect images such as lights or patterns) etc.). "Difficult to see" refers to a state in which the player cannot see a specific position completely, a state in which the player can see a certain position but it is difficult to see it, a state in which the player can see a certain position but the character is not visible from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance of the character appearing cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize a specific position and can visually recognize the appearance of the character from the specific position, but it is difficult to visually recognize the character.

"Timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" means the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position. This includes timings within predetermined periods before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player is under the illusion that this is the timing at which the display of the character first starts at a specific position).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size, which may cause an unnatural feeling such as a large character suddenly being displayed. to prevent players from experiencing this.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen,
The enlarged character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 396).

This makes it possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if multiple characters are appearing one after another from a certain depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end (example shown in FIG. 394). .

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent performance (for example, in FIG. 394 , example shown in FIG. 395).

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end,
No other characters in the group effect are displayed on the back side of the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 396).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, and it is as if multiple characters are being placed one after another from a position with depth. It is possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if a character is appearing.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Crowd preview performance) and
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled to be raised or lowered by the sound output means, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but the volume increase or decrease is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. The volume may be raised or lowered depending on the sound.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound rises to a specific volume is the fade-in time from when the volume of the production sound starts to decrease in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the performance sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 291).

As a result, the sound in the group preview performance is faded in for a short time and faded out for a longer time than the fade in, so that the sound for the group preview performance can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 37, the 6 shown in FIGS. 326 to 332 Crowd preview performance) and
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 291),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 326 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 328 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 329 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 330 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (a37) to FIG. 332 (a42)) period),
A brightness data table composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 296(a)). a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, a grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in FIG. 296(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. a data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 shown in FIG. 296(c));
Each of the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table includes first brightness data that is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness. and a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, as shown in FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 296),
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at higher brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps). High brightness ('0' to 'F') data is stored in more lamps than the number of lamps.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and since the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table, the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table. In the second display period, weak footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, strong footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing a more suitable group preview effect to the player. can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" are the data for the plurality of lighting parts included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, This is the lighting data (lighting elements) for each time in the upper lamp 9C (inner WWW). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 296(a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1 is be. Note that as RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000," data corresponding to low-intensity lighting is "100," and data corresponding to high-intensity lighting is "F00."

"Brightness data" is lighting data for each lighting means (for example, frame lamp, panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and includes "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 296(a), this is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 296(a), the brightness data is This is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R in No. 11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer brightness data switching interval than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals). , the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, it can be expressed that the character is running faster in the second display period than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are at equal intervals, while in the second luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are not equal (for example, as shown in FIG. 295). (The grandchild table W1 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec.)

Thereby, in the second display period, it is possible to express that a plurality of characters are running out of step, compared to the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for moving the lighting location in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp is Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of advance of the notice),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lighting location in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (lights up with brightness).

This makes it possible to represent a character appearing in the first display period and a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-2) The first brightness data table lights up the lighting means located near the character at high brightness in accordance with the advancing position of the character first displayed in the group presentation, so that the character It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting at low luminance the lighting means located near the unreached location (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 296(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character that is displayed at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness in areas that have not yet been reached, so the lamp will not turn on. It can be used to express the progress of a character running at the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-3) The first brightness data table causes the lighting means to turn on at high brightness, and then, as the first character displayed in the group presentation advances, the lighting means turns off or turns on at low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, the example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 296(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. , the progress of the leading character can be expressed using the lighting of lamps. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then lights up at high brightness the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group presentation. (For example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 296(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then does not cause the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect to light up at high brightness (for example, FIG. 296 (Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-5) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and turns off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 296(a) Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in FIG. 296(b) example).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data for increasing the number of lighting means to be turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, Table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice).

Accordingly, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness as the character progresses, so it is possible to express the progress of the character using turning off or lighting the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-3) The third brightness data table specifies that the switching interval of brightness data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located opposite to the direction in which the frame moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec) (The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to represent the character progressing from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means starts during the first display period, continues control of the lighting means during the second display period, and starts control of the lighting means during the third display period. control of the means ends;
In the third brightness data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 317).

As a result, the lamp lights up at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, so the progress of the character from before the second display period can be enlivened and expressed by the lighting of the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-2) The second luminance data table has a longer control period for the lighting means than the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
In the first luminance data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than in the third luminance data table (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 317).

Thereby, the appearance of a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the first display period can be expressed with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-1) The brightness data first defined in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that turns off or lights at low brightness the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 295). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the initial luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

As a result, the lamps will be turned on once the group preview performance is executed after adding a break, without mixing with the lighting of the lamps that was performed before the group preview performance is executed, making it more suitable. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is a brightness that does not cause the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low brightness. data (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the first brightness data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group preview effect has been executed, the player can watch the group preview effect without being separated by turning off all the lamps or lighting them at low brightness, with emphasis on the flow of the effect. can be shown. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that causes the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low luminance (for example, as shown in FIG. 295). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

Thereby, when the group preview performance ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the group preview performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 295, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps.) brightness data is specified as follows).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-2) The third brightness data table is designed so as not to repeat brightness data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the same brightness data is not repeated). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, with regard to the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be shorter than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the brightness data as is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 295, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. The brightness data is specified as follows),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is defined last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not defined last (for example, As shown in FIG. 295, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and 10-minute data for troubleshooting is not defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W2).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is specified, so that troubleshooting can be done during that 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-2) The brightness data for troubleshooting is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and the brightness data is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and This is brightness data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 295, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first luminance data table using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting, so it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-3) The brightness data for troubleshooting is brightness data for regularly lighting up the adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 296(a), the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes The brightness data is such that adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and regularly so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular manner so that the lighting location is shifted from the previous state, making it possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unsightly. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes monochrome lighting means that lights up in a single color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8), and multi-color lighting means that lights up in a plurality of colors (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9). ~9C13),
The brightness data for lighting the monochrome lighting means at a specific high brightness includes a specific value (for example, "6") as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness,
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, "8" to "F") as a value corresponding to lighting at the specific high brightness.

This makes it possible to adjust the variation in light between lamps that are lit at high brightness by setting an appropriate value for lighting at high brightness depending on the type of light emitting means, and to create a suitable group preview effect. can be provided.

(17-2) The monochrome lighting means includes a first color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a second color. lamps 9B1 to 9B5);
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, " 6”).

As a result, variations in light can be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, and a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include mutually different luminance data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, in FIG. 296 Frame lamp grandchild table shown),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance that is different from the group performance and foretells that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result is based on the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine. Common brightness data is included for each (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 303).

As a result, in the group preview performance, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, it is possible to realize a more detailed lighting mode, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. can.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect interrupts. It may be executed with
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview effect (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 403 and 404);
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the preview performance, or includes the lighting means used in the preview performance and the lighting means not used in the preview performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 302, in the reach line performance, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and attacker lamp, which are always used in the group preview performance, are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, since the common lamp is lit, the lighting performance can be realized without any discomfort, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. be able to. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed, but if the lamps lit in both are If they are different from each other, a large number of lamps will be lit in a complicated manner, which will look bad and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance is the same as the lighting of the lamps in other preview performances, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being lit in a complicated manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol feeding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, FIGS. 403 and 404). example shown),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 403 and 404).

As a result, even if the group preview performance is switched to another performance, the common lamp is lit, so it is possible to realize the lighting performance without any discomfort, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. .

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 276).

As a result, whether or not to perform the group preview performance is decided by lottery regardless of other performances, so the processing load related to the execution of the group preview performance can be reduced, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. .

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be turned on when controlling to the advantageous state, and does not turn on when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is set to turn on during a round in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur). (Lights up to notify you that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 295).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview performance lights up during the group preview performance, causing the player to misunderstand that they are in an advantageous state such as winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the user to press the push button 31B),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 295).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, causing the player to misunderstand that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Modified example]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained.

(About the display period of group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

Thereby, by making the character that first appears in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the fact that the group preview effect suggesting a jackpot has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, there is a 100% probability that the group preview effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the second half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the variable display result is a winning display result, the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group preview)
In this embodiment, the main character, Maid A (Yume-chan), appears as the first character in the first display period, but the character that appears most often in the second display period is the main character, Maid A. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

Thereby, the main character can be frequently shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the first character displayed in the first display period may be a premium character.

Thereby, the premium character can be shown to the player first in the first display period, and the group preview performance can be made to have an impact. Note that if the first character displayed in the first display period is a premium character, a jackpot may be determined. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

Note that the premier character may be a character with the lowest appearance rate among all states and performances, or may be a character that does not appear except in group preview performances. Moreover, the premium character may be a character whose appearance suggests that there is a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control in group preview presentation)
In this embodiment, the brightness data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 296, but the brightness data may be defined as follows. That is, first specific brightness data is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, and data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness. There is second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, the first brightness data table does not include the first specific lighting data, and the second brightness data table has Specific lighting data may also be used.

In this way, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified in the first display period, so it is possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching by lighting the lamp at low brightness, and the second display period During the display period, data that lights up at high brightness is specified, so it is possible to express the progress of a plurality of characters one after another.

Further, the third brightness data table may include brightness data that turns off all the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the progress and disappearance of the character in the third display period can be expressed by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member that can transmit light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means,
By lighting the specific lighting means, the color that is visible through the specific member becomes a specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include brightness data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table may not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means.

In this way, when a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in a group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, the light is transmitted through the transparent specific member located in front of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the visually recognized color from being a specific color that is not used in the group preview presentation, thereby interfering with the color tone of the group preview presentation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(About the video data of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 284, video data in which a character to be moved and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage, and the video data was stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays back the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It had become. However, the group preview presentation video may be played back using a method different from the above method.

For example, the data of the character to be acted upon and the data indicating the action details (movement pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 updates the character data and movement patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may also be possible to select each of the data shown in FIG.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or ROM 121, a plurality of pieces of data in which characters A, B, and C each run or walk are stored in storage area 1, and a plurality of arbitrary pieces of data are stored, although the characters are not determined. What is necessary is to store in the storage area 2 video data showing a plurality of movement patterns of the characters related to the group preview performance, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the characters from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes. The video data related to the group preview performance may also be extracted from the storage area 2, the video data of one group preview performance may be created by combining them, and the created video data may be played back.

(Regarding cases where the group preview performance and other preview performances overlap)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 388 and 401, when the execution period of a group preview effect overlaps the execution period of another preview effect, the display area of the image in the group preview effect is Larger than the image display area, and the image display in the group preview performance has priority over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is larger than the image display area in other preview performances) (in front of the displayed layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the execution period of a group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of another preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). Alternatively, if the execution period of the group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). In addition, if the execution period of a group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area in the group preview performance is The display may be prioritized over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is in front of the layer of image display in other preview performances). In addition, when the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance, for example, for preview images that attract the attention of players, such as images suggesting a jackpot, the image display area in the group preview performance may Images that are hidden but located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) include images that are not hidden by images in the group preview presentation and are visible.

(Example of time saving control without going through hit)
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) A game is played based on the variable display result becoming a specific display result after performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You can also do this. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You can also do this. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp , 10 General prize opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st starting port switch, 22B 2nd starting port switch, 23 Count Switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball batting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passage gate, 50 4th pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
It is possible to perform a specific performance different from the notification performance,
Characters used for the notification performance and the specific performance are depicted on the gaming machine,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the display is finished, a display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, a dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine that outputs sounds corresponding to parts .

Images